JP6656790B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, and an urging means having one end connected to the target member and the other end connected to the base member. There is known a gaming machine including an opposing member disposed to oppose a base member with an urging means interposed therebetween (Patent Document 1) .

JP-A-2014-28226 (for example, FIG. 20)

  However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the space in which the urging means can be arranged is limited.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily secure a space for disposing an urging unit.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a base member, a rack disposed linearly displaceable on the base member, and a pinion having a gear meshed with a gear of the rack. Biasing means having one end directly or indirectly connected to the rack and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member, and applying a biasing force to the rack by an elastic recovery force accompanying expansion and contraction; And a contact member, wherein the biasing means is configured such that a part between the one end and the other end is brought into contact with the contact member, thereby forming a linear portion including the one end. The linear portion including the other end is disposed in a bent posture that is non-parallel.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a board box .

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, since the urging means is disposed in a bent posture, it is possible to easily secure a space for disposing the urging means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the operation unit which disassembled from the front. It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. It is a rear view of a vertical slide unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled vertical slide unit as viewed from the front. It is the disassembled back perspective view of the up-down slide unit which looked at the disassembled up-down slide unit from the back. (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a rear view of a displacement member. 11A is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 11B, and FIG. 11B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. is there. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the displacement member which looked at the disassembled displacement member from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displaced member when the disassembled displaceable member is viewed from the rear. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled vertical slide unit as viewed from the front. It is the disassembled back perspective view of the up-down slide unit which looked at the disassembled up-down slide unit from the back. It is a front perspective view of a back base, an intermediate base, and a front base. It is a back perspective view of a back base, an intermediate base, and a front base. (A) is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism in a front view of the transmission mechanism in an assembled state, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the transmission mechanism in a rear view of the transmission mechanism in an assembled state. (A) is a front perspective view of the crank gear and the second rack in an exploded state, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the crank gear and the second rack in an exploded state. (A) is a front view of the vertical slide unit in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the ascending position, and (b) is a view of the vertical slide unit in a state where the displacement member is arranged between the ascending position and the descending position. It is a front view, (c) is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in the state where a displacement member was arranged in a descent position. FIG. 16 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 15. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG. 23 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 22. FIG. 24 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 23. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the second rack and the second pinion. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit. It is the disassembled back perspective view of the other side member which looked at the disassembled other side member from the back. It is a front view of a ring forming unit. It is a rear view of a ring forming unit. It is a front view of the other side annular unit. It is a rear view of the other side annular unit. It is the exploded front perspective view of the other side annular unit which looked at the disassembled other annular unit from the front. It is the disassembled back perspective view of the other-side annular unit which looked at the disassembled other-side annular unit from the back. It is a front perspective view of a back base. (A) is a front view of the drive mechanism in a state in which a posture for arranging the ring segment at the retracted position is formed, and (b) is a posture for arranging the ring segment at the ring formation position. It is a front view of the drive mechanism in the state performed. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a posture defining member. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the annular divided body as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIIa in FIG. 29, (b) is a partial enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 29, FIG. 38C is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring segment at the line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 38D is a portion of the ring segment at the line XXXVIIId-XXXVIIId in FIG. It is an expanded sectional view. (A) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit in a state where the ring segment is located at the retracted position, and (a) and (b) are diagrams in which the ring segment is retracted. FIGS. 4A and 4B are a front view and a rear view of a ring forming unit in a state where the ring forming unit is disposed between the position and the ring forming position. FIGS. It is a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit in FIG. (A) and (b) are the front view and the back view of the ring forming unit in the state where the ring divided body was arranged between the retreat position and the ring forming position. (A) and (b) are the front view and the back view of the ring formation unit in the state where the ring division body was arranged in the ring formation position. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the displacement member in 2nd Embodiment, (c) and (d) are partial enlargements of the displacement member in the state where the relative displacement by the ball joint mechanism was formed. It is sectional drawing. (A) and (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the displacement member in the third embodiment, and (c) and (d) are partial enlarged sectional views of the displacement member in a state where the rubber-like elastic body is elastically deformed. FIG. (A) is a rear view of the displacement member in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member along the line XLIVb-XLIVb in (a). (A) is a rear view of the displacement member in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the displacement member in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a), (c) is a figure. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a displacement member in an XLVc-XLVc line of (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of the displacement member in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base in a ninth embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base. It is an exploded back perspective view of the other side member in a 10th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a rear perspective view of the other side member. It is a rear view of the up-and-down slide unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the up-and-down slide unit in a 12th embodiment. It is a rear view of a vertical slide unit. (A) is a rear view perspective view of the other side member in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are schematic back views of the other side member schematically illustrating a state of a posture change of the biasing spring. FIG. (A) is a rear view of the vertical slide unit in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base in a 15th embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base in a 16th embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the ring segment in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a partial enlarged side view of the ring segment in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a diagram. FIG. 63 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring split body taken along the line LXIIIc-LXIIIc, and FIG. 63 (d) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring split body taken along the line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63 (b). It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit and the ring formation unit in an 18th embodiment. It is a partial cross section rear view of a vertical slide unit and a ring forming unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit and the ring formation unit in a 19th embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the projecting operation unit 400 and the composite operation unit 500 described below are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is arranged at the rotation position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 is made visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 can be visually recognized through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the change of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (increased) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, passing the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 to be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 such that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side above the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the ball is directed by the main control device 110. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and issues the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 when the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are sequentially superimposed on the internal space of the rear case 210. The decorative cover 500 is housed in a stacked state, and the decorative cover 500 is covered on the forefront.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall 211 and an outer wall 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 211, and a box whose one side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by the walls 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape as viewed from the front. The opening 211a has a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The vertical slide unit 300 includes a long displacement member 310, one side member 320 </ b> L and another side member 320 </ b> R that are provided at a predetermined distance and support the one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 respectively. And an interposition member 370 interposed between the lower ends of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R. The one-side member 320L, the other-side member 320R, and the interposition member 370 are attached to the rear case 210. Each is disposed on the bottom wall 211. The displacement member 310 is displaced along the up-down direction (the longitudinal direction of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R) while maintaining a posture parallel to the interposition member 370.

  The ring forming unit 400 includes a one-side ring unit 410L and the other-side ring unit 410R. The one-side ring unit 410L and the other-side ring unit 410R are connected to the one-side member 320L and the other members of the vertical slide unit 300. They are provided on the front (front) side of the side member 320R. In each of the annular units 410L and 410R, a pair of upper and lower annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are displaceably disposed. The ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing the ring shape into four in the circumferential direction. When each of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 is displaced to the center position, the divided surfaces come into contact with each other. Thus, an annular shape is formed (see FIG. 41).

  The decorative cover 500 is attached to the standing end surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and is disposed on the front (front) side of the ring forming unit 400. That is, the decorative cover 500 is partially covered only at a portion along the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and shields the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 from the player, while opening the opening 211a (ie, the (3) The symbol display device 81) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

  The detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 of the operation unit 200 thus configured will be described below. First, a detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  7 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300, and FIG. 8 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 300. FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled vertical slide unit 300 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled vertical slide unit 300 as viewed from the rear. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, in the vertical slide unit 300, the first racks 315 are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 in a posture parallel to each other. The rack 315 is meshed with each of the first pinions 351 provided on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In addition, the displacement member 310 has one longitudinal side and the other side slidably connected to the guide rod P, and in the assembled state, the guide rod P has its axial direction aligned with the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. It is disposed (fixed) on the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R in a posture aligned in the longitudinal direction.

  Accordingly, when the first pinion 351 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 341 and the first rack 315 is linearly moved by the rotation, the displacement member 310 is guided by the vertical sliding unit 300 with the linear movement. While being guided by the rod P, it is displaced along the longitudinal direction of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R (see FIG. 21). Here, a detailed configuration of the displacement member 310 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11A is a front view of the displacement member 310, and FIG. 11B is a rear view of the displacement member 310. FIG. 12A is a partially enlarged sectional view of the displacement member 310 taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 11B, and FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating the displacement member 310 taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. It is the elements on larger scale sectional view. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the displaced member 310 when the disassembled displaceable member 310 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displaceable member 310 when the disassembled displaceable member 310 is viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the displacement member 310 includes a main body 311 formed in an elongated shape in a rectangular shape in a front view, and a cylinder protruding toward the front at a longitudinal center of the main body 311. -Shaped rotating base 312, a rotating body 313 which is rotatably and concentrically supported by the rotating base 312 and has a circular shape in a front view, and an end side which is displaceably connected to one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311. It mainly includes a portion 314 and a first rack 315 fastened and fixed to the back surface of the end side portion 314.

  A pair of upper and lower projecting pins 311a are respectively provided on the main body 311 so as to project from the rear surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The protruding pin 311 a is a portion for connecting the end portion 314 to the main body 311 so as to be displaceable, is formed in a columnar shape having a circular cross section, and is inserted into the elongated hole 314 a of the end portion 314.

  The pair of upper and lower protruding pins 311a is arranged along a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the main body 311 (vertical direction in FIG. 11B), and the protruding pins 311a on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311 and the longitudinal direction. The protruding pins 311a on the other side are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the body 311 (the left-right direction in FIG. 11B).

  In addition, the main body 311 has stopper surfaces 311b formed on end surfaces on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side and right side in FIG. 11A). The stopper surface 311b is a part for regulating the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end side part 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body 311.

  A drive motor and a gear mechanism (both not shown) are provided inside the rotation base 312, and the rotation drive force of the drive motor is transmitted to the rotation body 313 by the gear mechanism, thereby rotating the rotation body 313. It is relatively rotated with respect to the base 312 (the main body 311). The rotation base 312 is fixed to the main body 311. Therefore, as described later, the displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be regulated by holding the rotation base 312 by another member (for example, see FIG. 65).

  An elongated hole 314a, a stopper surface 314b, and a slider holding portion 314c are formed in the end side portion 314. The elongated hole 314a is a pair of upper and lower through holes for receiving the respective projecting pins 311a of the main body 311 and is formed as an oblong hole in a front view. The oblong hole 314a is formed so that the long-diameter direction of the oblong shape is perpendicular to the direction in which the end portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 and the one-side member 320L). And the other side member 320R (the left-right direction in FIG. 11B).

  In this case, between the protruding pin 311a of the main body 311 and the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314, a flange that projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion and the cylindrical portion. And a color C composed of two parts. In the collar C, the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the protruding pin 311a of the main body portion 311. The outer diameter of the cylindrical portion is equal to or shorter than the shorter diameter of the elongated hole 314a of the end portion 314. The dimension is set to be slightly smaller, and the outer diameter of the flange portion is set to be larger than the major axis in the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 12).

  Thereby, as described later, the protruding pin 311a of the main body 311 is moved through the collar C within the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 in the major diameter direction of the elongated hole 314a (the left-right direction in FIG. 12A). Can be displaced along. That is, the main body 311 can be displaced relative to the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 27). In addition, since the collar C rolls between the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a by interposing the collar C in this manner, the relative displacement can be smoothly performed, and the wear is suppressed. As a result, the durability can be improved.

  The stopper surface 314b is a portion for restricting the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, is formed as a flat surface, and is in an assembled state (the main body 311 and the end side 314). (In a state where the portion 314 is connected), it is formed at a position facing the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 at a predetermined interval.

  The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body 311 and the end portion 314 are formed when the protruding pins 311a of the main body 311 are located at the centers of the long holes 314a of the end portion 314 in the major axis direction (that is, in the drawing). 11 (a), when the main body 311 is not inclined and is in a parallel posture with respect to the left and right end side portions 314), they face each other in a parallel posture.

  In addition, while maintaining this parallel posture, each protruding pin 311a (collar C) is positioned at one end (the left side in FIG. 11A) of the long hole 314a in the long diameter direction or the other end in the long diameter direction (FIG. 11A). In the case of displacement to the right end), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval on both one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311 (between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b). A gap is formed in the gap).

  On the first rack 315, a rack portion 315a and a slider holding portion 315c are formed. The rack portion 315a is a portion formed as a rack in which a side surface of a plate-shaped member is tooth-cut, and is meshed with the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 9) of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R. In the assembled state, the teeth are arranged in a posture parallel to the axis of the guide rod P.

  The slider holding portion 315c is a portion for holding the slider S between the slider holding portion 314c of the end portion 314. The slider holding portion 314c of the end portion 314 and the slider holding portion 314c of the first rack 315 are each formed into a shape obtained by vertically dividing a cylinder into two parts, and are assembled (the first rack is fastened and fixed to the end portion 314). The slider S is held between the opposing surfaces (between the inner peripheral surfaces of the cylinders).

  The slider S is a cylindrical member that is fitted onto the guide rod P and slides along the axial direction of the guide rod P. The outer diameter of the slider S is set to a size corresponding to the inner diameter of the slider holding parts 314c and 315c. Is set. A pair of upper and lower locking walls protrude inward from the inner peripheral surfaces of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. In the assembled state, the pair of upper and lower locking walls are formed on the axial end surface of the slider S. By contact, the slider S is prevented from coming off in the axial direction.

  As described above, the slider S is interposed between the guide rod P and the end side 314 and the first rack 315, so that the slider S can be slidably moved with respect to the guide rod P made of brass. While it can be formed from a material having excellent wear resistance, the material of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be set independently of the guide rod P made of brass. That is, since the end side portion 314 is a member that regulates the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 by the stopper surface 314c, it is effective that a material that can secure rigidity at the time of the regulation can be selected. On the other hand, since the first rack 315 is a member meshed with the first pinion 351 and linearly moved by receiving its rotational driving force, it is effective to be able to select a material capable of securing rigidity for maintaining the meshing state. Becomes

  Returning to FIG. 7 to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is disposed on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 by rotating the first pinions 351 disposed on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively. The first racks 315 provided are respectively linearly moved, whereby the displacement member 310 is slid vertically while being guided along guide rods P fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Is done. Here, the detailed configuration of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled vertical slide unit 300 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled vertical slide unit 300 as viewed from the rear. is there.

  Although the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R have slightly different shapes, the portions that exhibit technical functions are symmetrical left and right (plane-symmetric with respect to a virtual plane located at the center between the opposing members). ), And the configuration is substantially the same, so that the other side member 320R will be described below as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the other-side member 320 </ b> R includes a back base 331, an intermediate base 332 covered on the front (front) side of the back base 331, and a front (front) of the intermediate base 332. The front base 333 covered on the side, the drive motor 341 attached to the intermediate base 332, the first pinion 351 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 334, and the drive motor 334 to the first pinion 351 And a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force. Here, the detailed configurations of the rear base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the rear base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the rear base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the rear base 331 has a substantially L-shape in a front view from a main body part formed in a vertically long shape and a protruding part protruding laterally from a lower end of the main body part. The transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 15 and 16) for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 341 to the first pinion is housed between the intermediate base member 332.

  The rear base 331 has a pinion shaft 331a and a rack shaft 331b projecting from the front of the main body (a surface facing the intermediate base 332), and has a first opening 331c and a second opening in the main body and the overhanging part. The openings 331d are respectively formed.

  The pinion shaft 331a is a shaft having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 19), and the rack shaft 331b is a guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 (see FIG. 19). And a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for restricting the attitude of the second rack 364. In addition, a screw is fastened to the end surface of the pinion shaft 331a, and the head of the screw serves as a stopper for the first pinion 351. The diameter of the rack shaft 331b is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the width of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364, and the second rack 364 is rotatable around the rack shaft 331b.

  The rack shaft 331b is disposed at a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 when the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are assembled. In detail, the arrangement position of the rack shaft 331b is set such that the direction connecting the axis of the rack shaft 331b and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is orthogonal to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364. . Accordingly, as described later, the second rack 364 in which the guide groove 364a is guided by the rack shaft 331b can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a that is supported by the gear shaft 332i ( See FIG. 26).

  The first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are openings that extend linearly, respectively, and correspond to regions (biased in a front view) corresponding to the urging springs 366 (see FIG. 22) disposed in a bent posture. (The region overlapping the spring 366). Therefore, when the urging spring 366 is mounted, after the urging spring 366 is housed between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the urging spring 366 is moved through the first opening 331c or the second opening 331d. Since the operation of locking the end portion to the counterpart member can be performed, it is possible to carry out mounting in a bent posture while suppressing the biasing spring 366 from being repelled (jumping by its own elastic recovery force). The mounting operation of the biasing spring 366 will be described later (see FIG. 28).

  Note that the biasing spring 366 is a coil spring, and since the outer peripheral surface is curved in an arc shape, the opening width of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d should be smaller than the diameter of the biasing spring 366. Is preferred. This is because the lowering of the rigidity of the rear base 331 can be suppressed while the engagement of the ends and the suppression of the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

  The intermediate base 332 is formed in a shape corresponding to the rear base 331. That is, the intermediate base 332 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a front view from a main body part formed in a vertically long shape and a protruding part projecting laterally from a lower end of the main body part. The transmission mechanism is accommodated in the space formed between the opposing surfaces by being covered on the front (front) side.

  A first pinion insertion window 332a and a motor shaft insertion window 332b are formed in the body of the intermediate base 332, and a plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i are formed from the back of the body (a surface facing the back base 331). And a roller shaft 332r protruding therefrom. The first pinion insertion window 332a is an opening for exposing the first pinion 351 pivotally supported by the pinion shaft 331a of the back base 331 to the front (front) side of the intermediate base 332, and thereby the first pinion 351 can be engaged with the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 (see FIG. 21).

  The motor shaft insertion window 332 b connects the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 attached to the front (front) of the intermediate base 332 to the gear 361 of the transmission mechanism housed between the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332. It is an opening for. Further, the plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i are shaft-like bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the gears 362a to 362e of the transmission mechanism, the crank gear 363, and the transmission gear 365, respectively. Screws are fastened to the end faces of the gear shafts 332c to 332i, and the heads of the screws are used to prevent the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363, and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism from coming off.

  The roller shaft 332r is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the roller 367 (see FIG. 19) of the transmission mechanism. The roller 367 supported by the roller shaft 332r is held by the opposing surfaces of the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 (the opposing surface is prevented from coming off).

  The intermediate base 332 has a pair of right and left regulating walls 332t protruding from the rear surface (the surface facing the rear base 331) of the main body, and is formed on the front surface (the surface facing the front base 333) of the main body. A pair of upper and lower holding recesses 332j and 332k are formed, and a connecting shaft 332m protrudes from a front surface (a surface facing the front base 333) of the protruding portion.

  The regulating wall 332t is a part for regulating the posture of the second rack 364, and a pair is formed at a predetermined interval. The opposing interval between the pair of regulating walls 332t is set to be larger than the width dimension of the second rack 364, and is formed so as to have a gap with the side surface of the second rack 364. Therefore, the second rack 364 can be rotated about the rack shaft 331b by the gap (see FIG. 26).

  The holding recesses 332j and 332k are portions for holding the upper end side and the lower end side of the guide rod P, respectively, and are separated in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 17) by a distance equivalent to the length dimension of the guide rod P. As well as being located, the front base 333 side is formed as an open concave portion. The depth and width of such a concave portion are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the guide rod P. Therefore, the guide rod P is fitted into the holding recesses 332j and 332k, and the front base 333 is covered (fastened and fixed) on the intermediate base 332, so that the guide rod P is provided between the rear surface of the front base 333 and the holding recesses 332j and 332k. The guide rod P can be firmly held by sandwiching the P.

  As a result, the other side member 320R is assembled without the front base 333, the guide rod P is held by the displacement member 310, and the guide rod P held by the displacement member 310 is fitted into the holding recesses 332j and 332k. By attaching (fastening and fixing) the front base 333, the other side member 320R and the displacement member 310 can be connected. Therefore, the assembling work of the vertical slide unit 300 can be made more efficient.

  The connection shaft 332m is a shaft-like body having a circular cross-section serving as a connection portion with the interposition member 370, and is rotatably inserted into a connection hole in the connection plate 371 of the interposition member 370, so that the connection shaft 332m is connected to the other side member 320R. The interposition member 370 is connected. That is, the other-side member 320R and the interposition member 370 are connected so that the relative position can be adjusted. Thereby, as described later, when the vertical slide unit 300 is mounted on the rear case 210, the mounting operation can be performed while adjusting the mounting position, so that the workability can be improved.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the transmission mechanism and the first pinion 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19A is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism in a front view of the transmission mechanism in an assembled state, and FIG. 19B is a rear perspective view of the transmission mechanism in a rear view of the transmission mechanism in an assembled state.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in the transmission mechanism, a gear 361 connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and a leading gear (gear 362a) mesh with the gear 361. Gears 362a to 362e as a gear train, a crank gear 363 meshed with a tail gear 362e of the gear train, a second rack 364 driven by a crank mechanism of the crank gear 363, and the second rack 364 , A biasing spring 366 for applying a biasing force to the second rack 364, and a roller 367 for bringing the biasing spring 366 into a bent position. .

  Here, a detailed configuration of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20A is a front perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in an exploded state, and FIG. 20B is a rear perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in an exploded state.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the crank gear 363 has an eccentric pin 363a projecting at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and a side on which the eccentric pin 363a projects. , A detected portion 363b protrudes from the opposite side. The eccentric pin 363a is formed in a cylindrical shape having a circular cross section, and is inserted into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 in the assembled state. The detected portion 363b is a portion that is detected by a sensor device (not shown). The sensor device determines the rotation position (phase) of the crank gear 363 according to the detection / non-detection of the detected portion 363b by the detection portion. ) Is detected. Based on the detection result, main controller 110 can recognize that displacement member 310 is located at the ascending position (see FIG. 21A) or the descending position (see FIG. 21C).

  A guide groove 364a and a rack groove 364b are formed in the second rack 364. The guide groove 364a is an opening through which the rack shaft 331b (see FIG. 17) of the rear base 331 is inserted, and is straight in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack (the vertical direction in FIGS. 20A and 20B). It is extended in a shape.

  The rack groove 364b is a concave groove through which the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted, and extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack. The groove width of the rack groove 364b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the eccentric pin 363a, and the eccentric pin 363a can slide along the rack groove 364b with the rotation of the crank gear 363. .

  The rack groove 364b is linearly extended in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack (that is, a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear movement of the second rack 364), so that the eccentric pin of the crank gear 363 will be described later. The generation of a component other than the linear movement direction of the second rack 364 from the force component acting on the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 from the second rack 364 can be suppressed, and accordingly, the resistance when the second rack 364 is linearly moved. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 19A and FIG. The transmission gear 365 includes a second pinion 365a meshed with the rack of the second rack 364, and a speed increasing portion 365b meshed with the first pinion 351. The second pinion 365a and the speed increasing portion 365b are combined with each other. It is formed integrally in a concentric state.

  The biasing spring 366 is a coil spring made of metal, and has one end locked to the lower end of the second rack 364 and the other end locked to the end of the protruding portion of the intermediate base 332. When the second rack 364 is located at the lower end of the movable range, the urging spring 366 is in an elastically deformed state. The urging spring 366 applies the elastic recovery force to the second rack 364 as an urging force. When the second rack 364 is displaced from the lower end to the upper end of the movable range, the second rack 364 is further tensilely deformed in accordance with the displacement, thereby gradually increasing the urging force applied to the second rack, and the second rack 364 is movable. When it reaches the upper end of the range, it is in the most tensilely deformed state, and applies the maximum urging force to the second rack 364.

  As described later, the urging spring 366 applies an urging force to the second rack 364 in a direction (inclination direction) that is not parallel to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364 (see FIGS. 22 to 25). By forming the urging spring 366 from a coil spring, a structure in which the direction of applying the urging force is not parallel to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364 can be simplified. Further, since the urging force according to the displacement of the second rack 364 can be continuously applied, the second rack 364 can be urged stably.

  The roller 367 has a cylindrical cylindrical portion 367a rotatably supported by a roller shaft 332r (see FIG. 18) of the intermediate base 332, and protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a. A flange 367b is provided, and an outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a is brought into contact between one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366, thereby forming a bent posture of the biasing spring 366.

  Returning to FIG. 7 to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The interposition member 370 is formed in a long shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and is interposed between the lower ends of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R as described above. Specifically, a pair of flat connection plates 671 are suspended from the lower surface (the lower side surface in FIG. 7) of the interposition member 370, and each connection plate 671 has one circular connection hole in a front view. The connecting member 370 is inserted between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R by inserting the connecting shaft 332m, which is formed to penetrate and protrudes from the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332, into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 671. Is established.

  A screw is fastened to the end surface of the connection shaft 332m, and the head of the screw serves as a stopper for the connection plate 671. In this case, the inside diameter of the connection hole in the connection plate 671 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 332m, and the thickness of the connection plate 671 is slightly smaller than the protruding height of the connection shaft 332m. Is set to Therefore, the connection portion between the interposition member 370 and the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R is in a state where the connection plate 671 is rotatably supported by the connection shaft 332m.

  As described above, in the vertical slide unit 300, the displacement member 310 is formed so as to be displaceable along the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 7) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. That is, the displacement member 310 is formed so that one side (the left side in FIG. 7) and the other side (the right side in FIG. 7) in the longitudinal direction can be guided by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively. By being provided, it is displaced along the longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R.

  Conventionally, in such a unit (that is, a structure in which the displacement member 310 is bridged between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R), the rigidity of the entire unit is low, and the unit is easily damaged. That is, since the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R are easily deformed with respect to the displacement member 310 (for example, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R that should be in a posture parallel to each other in a front view are “C”. (A side member 320L and another side member 320R that should be in a posture parallel to each other in a side view are deformed into a “V” shape). In addition, the load concentrates on the connecting portion between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R and the displacement member 310, so that it is easily broken. Therefore, for example, in the transporting process of transporting such a unit or the attaching process of attaching the unit to the mating member, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R are in a “C” shape or a “V” shape with respect to the displacement member 310. It has to be handled so as not to be deformed, resulting in deterioration of workability.

  On the other hand, according to the vertical slide unit 300 of the present embodiment, since the interposed member 320 provided between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R is provided, the entire unit is formed into a frame shape, and its rigidity is reduced. Improvement can be achieved. That is, it is possible to prevent the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R from being deformed into a “C” shape or a “V” shape with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, handling in the unit state can be facilitated, and workability in the transporting step and the attaching step can be improved.

  A guide rod P made of brass is fixed to each of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, and the guide rod P is attached to both ends of the displacement member 310 (the slider holding portions of the first rack 315 and the end side portion 314). 314c) is connected, so that the displacement member 310 can be connected to the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R via the guide rod P, whereby the displacement member 310 is connected to the one-side member 320L and the other-side member. A closed connection loop between 320R and interposition member 370 can be formed.

  That is, in the conventional product (that is, the embodiment without the guide rod P in the present embodiment), the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 and the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are disposed. The connection loop is cut off, and the displacement member 310 is disconnected from the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 can be connected to the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R via the guide bar P (forming a closed connection loop). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire vertical slide unit 300 can be increased. Further, since the guide rod P is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, the rigidity of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is improved accordingly. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole.

  As described later, the displacement member 310 is guided by the one-side member 320L and guided by the other-side member 320R by connecting the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 (and the first rack 315) so as to be relatively displaceable. (That is, the degree of linear movement of the first rack 315 driven by the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L, and the degree of linear movement of the first pinion 320R of the other side member 320R. Even if a deviation occurs between the linear movement of the first rack 315 and the degree of the linear movement, the deviation is absorbed by the relative displacement, and the displacement member 310 is stably displaced (see FIG. 27). ).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the end portion 314 and the first rack 315 are connected to the guide rod P via the slider S (that is, in a form surrounding the guide rod P), and Since the displacement is restricted in any direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction), the posture of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 when the displacement member 310 is slid and displaced can be stabilized. Accordingly, when a deviation occurs between the guide by the one-side member 320L and the guide by the other-side member 320R, the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end side 314 and the first rack 315. Can easily occur, and the function of absorbing the displacement due to the relative displacement can be reliably exhibited.

  Here, as described above, the interposed member 370 is inserted into the connection hole of the connection plate 371 in a rotatable state so that the connection shaft 332m is rotatable. They are connected so that they can be displaced (relatively rotated). Therefore, since the relative positions of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R and the interposition member 370 can be adjusted, the workability when attaching the vertical slide unit 300 to the rear case 210 can be improved. For example, even after the one-side member 320L is attached to a predetermined position on the bottom wall 211 of the rear case 210, the other-side member 320R is displaced from the predetermined position on the bottom wall 211 of the rear case 210, The position of the other side member 320R can be adjusted to a predetermined position, and as a result, workability can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the displacement member 310, the main body 311, the end side portion 314, and the first rack 315 are formed so as to be relatively displaceable, and such relative displacement is defined by the left-right direction (the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310) as the major axis direction. Since the long hole 314a is used, the relative rotation between the interposed member 370 and the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R is used to secure the rigidity of the entire vertical slide unit 300. This is particularly effective in ensuring compatibility with the function of adjusting the mounting position.

  Next, the operation of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, hereinafter, the other side member 320R will be described as a representative example, and description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

  FIG. 21A is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the ascending position, and FIG. 21B is a diagram in which the displacement member 310 is arranged between the ascending position and the descending position. FIG. 21C is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position. FIGS. 21A to 21C show a state where the front base 333 is removed so that the first pinion 351 and the first rack 315 can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 22 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 23 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in FIG. 24 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 22, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. is there.

  22 and 23 correspond to the state where the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 21 (a) is arranged at the ascending position, and FIGS. 24 and 25 show that the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. It corresponds to the state where it is arranged at the position. 22 and 24, the illustration of the first pinion 351 is omitted. Also, a state where the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state where the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated) is illustrated. However, the hatching on the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 (a), 22 and 23, when the displacement member 310 is located at the lowered position, the transmission mechanism moves the second rack 364 to the lowest position in the movable range (see FIGS. 22 and 23). 23), and the biasing spring 366 is in the most contracted state. In this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 22)) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is changed by the gear train (gears 362 a to 362 e). The crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG.

  When the crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 22, the eccentric pin 363 a of the crank gear 363 slides along the rack groove 364 b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is moved. The second pinion 365a is displaced upward (upward in FIG. 22), and the second pinion 365a is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. That is, the transmission gear 365 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 365 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the speed increasing portion 365b, and the first pinion 351 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 23)).

  The clockwise (clockwise) rotation of the first pinion 351 in FIG. 23 is a counterclockwise (clockwise) rotation of the other side member 320R in FIG. 21 (a), so that the first pinion 351 in FIG. a) The first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 is displaced (downward) downward (downward in FIG. 21A) by the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) rotation. Thereby, the displacement member 310 is lowered as shown in FIG. 21 (b), and thereafter, the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. 21 (c).

  In a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. 21C, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the transmission mechanism is such that the second rack 364 is at the uppermost position in the movable range (FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (upper side in FIG. 25), and the biasing spring 366 is in the most extended state. In this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 24)) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is transmitted via the transmission mechanism to the above-described operation. Is transmitted to the first pinion 351 by the reverse action, and the first pinion 351 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 23). As a result, the displacement member 310 is raised as shown in FIG. 21 (b), and thereafter, the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position shown in FIG. 21 (a).

  Here, in the present embodiment, after the linear motion of the second rack 364 is transmitted to the transmission gear 365 and the first pinion 351 and converted into a rotational motion, the rotational motion is transmitted from the first pinion 351 to the first rack 315. By adopting a two-stage rack structure in which the displacement is converted into a linear motion, the stroke amount of the displacement member 310 (first rack 315) is secured. In such a two-stage rack structure, when a third pinion rotationally driven by the drive motor 341 is employed as a configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364, the second rack 364 has a tooth surface for the second pinion 365b and It is necessary to ensure each of the tooth surfaces for the third pinion, which increases the size of the second rack 364 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364 is formed by the crank mechanism (the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 and the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364) instead of the third pinion. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the tooth surface for the third pinion on the second rack 364, and the longitudinal dimension of the second rack 364 can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, the rack groove 364b extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the second rack 364 (that is, a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear movement of the second rack 364, the left-right direction in FIG. 22). When the eccentric pin 363a slides in the rack groove 364b due to the rotation of the crank gear 363, a component other than the linear movement direction of the second rack 364 is generated in the force component applied from the eccentric pin 363a to the rack groove 364b. And the resistance can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the energy consumption required for the linear movement of the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

  The detection that the displacement member 310 is located at the raised position shown in FIG. 21A or the lowered position shown in FIG. 21C detects the detected portion 363b of the crank gear 363 by the sensor device as described above. It is done by doing. In this case, for example, sensor devices are disposed at the start and end of the movable range of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, respectively, and the displacement member 310 is disposed at the ascending position or the descending position according to the detection result of each sensor device. In the structure for detecting that the first and second racks 315 and 364 have been detected, it is necessary to dispose the sensor devices at separate positions such as the start and end of the linear movement of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, and accordingly, the wiring becomes longer. If the wiring becomes long, not only does the material cost increase, but also it is necessary to route the wiring while avoiding interference with other members, and the degree of freedom in design deteriorates, and it becomes involved in the operation of other members This increases the risk of disconnection. In particular, in the structure in which the transmission mechanism is accommodated between the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to route the wiring while avoiding interference with other members (transmission mechanism). .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the detected portion 363b is provided on the crank gear 363, and the rotational position (phase) of the detected portion 363 is detected by the sensor device, so that the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position. Since it is a structure for detecting that the operation has been performed, each sensor device can be arranged close to each other. Therefore, the wiring can be shortened, so that not only the material cost can be reduced, but also the design flexibility and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed.

  Here, in the structure in which the displacement member 310 is moved up and down, a larger driving force is required when the displacement member 310 is moved up than when it is moved down due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member 310. In this case, in the present embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 21C, the urging spring 366 is in the most extended state as shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the displacement member 310 is raised to the raised position, the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is used to raise the displacement member 310 (ie, to displace the second rack 364 downward (downward in FIGS. 24 and 25)). Can be used as a force for That is, the driving force of the drive motor 341 can be assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 366.

  However, in such a structure in which the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364, the transmission of the driving force between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a tends to be unstable. That is, the guide mechanism that guides the linear movement of the second rack 364 has a predetermined tolerance, and a gap exists between the guide mechanism and the second rack 364 by the tolerance. The rack 364 has rattling. Therefore, when the second rack 364 performs a linear movement, it cannot be completely displaced on a straight line, and the posture of the second rack 364 is disturbed by the above-mentioned tolerance (gap) (approaching to and separating from the second pinion 365a). Rattling). Therefore, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In this case, in the structure provided from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364, if the direction of the urging force matches the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, the urging spring 366 The urging force acts as a force that promotes the attitude of the second rack 364.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is different from the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364. Since the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (inclined), the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 as a force in a direction of pressing the second rack 364 against one side of the guide mechanism for guiding the second rack 364. Can work. As a result, the second rack 364 is less likely to rattle, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a change in posture.

  Further, the direction of the urging force applied to the second rack 364 from the urging spring 366 is made non-parallel (inclined) with respect to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is formed. Even if the attitude of the attitude changes once, the urging force of the urging spring 366 can be applied to the second rack 364 as a force in the direction to converge the attitude of the attitude. Therefore, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be stabilized, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  In the present embodiment, the direction in which the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied is inclined in a direction in which the lower end of the second rack 364 is urged toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (for example, the left side in FIG. 22). . That is, since the direction in which the urging force is applied is a direction that generates a force component that brings the tooth surface of the second rack 364 closer to the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a, the gap between these tooth surfaces can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when transmitting the driving force from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth surfaces, and to improve the responsiveness. In addition, it is possible to suppress the abrasion of the tooth surface due to the collision between the tooth surfaces immediately after the transmission of the driving force from the stop state (the initial stage of meshing), and to suppress the tooth surface from being damaged. Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing (engaging) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained at a constant level.

  Here, as described above, in a structure in which the driving force of the drive motor 341 is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 366, it is difficult to secure a space for disposing the urging spring 366. Therefore, it is difficult to make the length dimension of the urging spring 366 to be a length dimension capable of exerting a desired urging force. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the urging spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture, so that the length of the urging spring 366 is ensured while avoiding interference with other members. be able to.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, from the main body portion and the protruding portion protruding from the main body portion. Is used as a space for disposing the urging spring 366, not only is it possible to dispose the urging spring 366 in a bent posture, but also to increase the rigidity of the structure composed of the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized. Further, since the projecting portion projects inward from the lower ends of the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the dead space formed below the interposition member 370 is effective as a space for disposing the projecting portion. Available to Further, by forming the connection shaft 332m on the front surface of the overhanging portion (intermediate base 332), the connection work with the interposition member 370 can be facilitated, the workability can be improved, and the interposition member can be improved. The effect of improving the rigidity of the entire vertical slide unit 300 due to the provision of the 370 can be enhanced.

  Next, the meshing (engaging) state of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 26A to 26C are partially enlarged front views of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and correspond to FIG. 26B, the second rack 364 is rotated clockwise about the rack shaft 331b with respect to the state of FIG. 26A, while in FIG. 26C, FIG. The state where the second rack 364 is rotated counterclockwise about the rack shaft 331b with respect to the state of FIG. FIG. 26 illustrates a state where the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state where the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated). However, the hatching on the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

  As described above, when the second rack 364 performs a linear motion, it cannot be completely displaced on a straight line, and the position of the second rack 364 is rampant (the second position) by the tolerance (gap) of the guide mechanism. A rattling occurs in a direction approaching and separating from the two pinions 365a (left and right directions in FIG. 26A). Therefore, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack shaft 331b of the rear base 331 is disposed to face the second pinion 365a, and the rack shaft 331b is rotatable and slidable in the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364. Is inserted through. Therefore, when the second rack 364 performs a linear motion, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the second pinion 365a can be rotated about the rack shaft 331b, and the tooth surface of the second rack 364 is changed. It can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a.

  In other words, when the attitude of the second rack 364 is unsteady, the unsteadiness is not caused by the play in the direction approaching or separating from the second pinion 365a (the left-right direction in FIG. 26A), but by the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. (Rotation about the rack shaft 331b). This makes it easy to maintain a constant meshing (engaging) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and stabilizes the transmission of the driving force.

  In this case, since the guide groove 364a is formed in the plate surface of the second rack 364 and the rack shaft 331b is formed in a region of the rear base 331 facing the second rack 364, the guide groove 364a and the rack shaft are formed. 331b can be arranged on the locus of the linear movement of the second rack 364. That is, it is not necessary to form a portion (guide groove 364a, rack shaft 331b) for displacing the second rack 364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a outside the outer shape of the second rack 364, Since the second rack 364 can be disposed in a dead space in which other members cannot be disposed because it is a space for moving the second rack 364, the space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

  Next, an operation of the movable mechanism of the displacement member 310 (a structure in which the end portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be displaced relative to the main body 311) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 27A to 27C are partial enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit 300. FIG. In FIG. 27A, a state in which the degrees of the slide displacement coincide with each other at the left and right end side parts 314 is shown. In FIG. 27B, there is a deviation in the degree of the slide displacement at the left and right end side parts 314. FIG. 27C illustrates a state in which the stopper function is exerted by the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b because the deviation of the degree of the slide displacement exceeds a predetermined amount.

  As described above, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven by the other-side member 320R, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 22 to 25). The first pinion 351 is rotated. A first rack 315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 (the right side in FIG. 21) is meshed with the first pinion 351 of the other side member 320R, and the first rack 315 is used for rotation of the first pinion 351. Accompanying this is a linear motion (up or down). At the same time, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven by the one side member 320L, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism, and the first pinion 351 is rotated. The first rack 315 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 is meshed with the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L, and the first rack 315 linearly moves (rises) with the rotation of the first pinion 351. Or descend). As a result, the displacement member 310 is displaced in the vertical direction (the longitudinal direction of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R) (see FIG. 21).

  However, in the structure in which one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 is separately guided and driven by the one-side member 320L, and the other side in the longitudinal direction is separately guided and driven by the other-side member 320R, the guide and the drive by the one-side member 320 are not included. In addition, deviation between the guide and the drive by the other-side member 320R is likely to occur. Therefore, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance and driving by the one-side member 320 and the guidance and driving by the other-side member 320R, not only the load on each drive motor 341 becomes excessive, but also the stop of the displacement member 310 may be caused. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protruding pin 311a of the main body 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side 314 (see FIG. 12), so that the end side 314 and the One rack 315 is formed to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, for example, when the displacement member 310 is raised, the guidance or drive by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R (for example, one side and the other side). (In the case where a difference occurs in the sliding resistance of the slider S or the case where the driving force varies in the driving motor 341 on one side and the other side), as shown in FIG. The linear motion of the first rack 315 (the left side in FIG. 27B) guided and driven precedes the linear motion of the first rack 315 (the right side in FIG. 27B) guided and driven by the other side member 320R. (Located on the upper side in FIG. 27B).

  That is, when a deviation occurs between the guidance or driving by the one-side member 320L and the guidance or driving by the other-side member 320R, the deviation is changed to the displacement member 310 as shown in FIG. It can be absorbed by a movable mechanism (a structure in which the end portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be displaced relative to the main body 311). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop the displacement member 310 from stopping.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the elongated hole 314a constituting the movable mechanism is in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the end portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310). Thus, a long slot shape is formed in the direction connecting the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (FIG. 27 (a) left and right directions) (see FIG. 13). Therefore, when the guide or drive by the one side member 320L is different from the guide or drive by the other side member 320R (in a case where a deviation occurs), the main body 311 is moved along with the difference. Displacement (sliding) along the elongated hole 314a of the end side 314 of the protruding pin 311a is likely to occur, whereby one end side 314 is more along the guide rod P than the other end side 314. The shift to the form shown in FIG. 27 (b) in which the displacement precedes can be reliably performed.

  Since two long holes 314a are formed in each end side part 314 in parallel, and two projecting pins 311a are respectively provided on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 311. The connection strength between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is ensured, and rattling or wobbling of the main body portion 311 when the displacement member 310 is slid vertically can be suppressed.

  Stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are formed on the main body 311 and the end side portion 314, respectively. In the assembled state, the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval (see FIG. 12). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the displacement at one end side 314 precedes the displacement at the other end side 314, the displacement difference exceeds the specified amount, as shown in FIG. As shown in ()), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b can be restricted by contacting each other. Thereby, breakage of the projecting pin 311a can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a drive motor 341 is provided for each of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R, and both sides of the displacement member 310 on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction are driven (both sides are driven). As compared with the case of the structure driven by the drive motor 341 (one-sided drive), the shared load of the drive motor 341 can be reduced, and accordingly, the displacement member 310 can be enlarged or the displacement speed of the displacement member 310 can be increased. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, in such a double-sided drive structure, it is impossible to completely synchronize the drive on the one-side member 320L and the drive on the other-side member 320R, and a shift is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable mechanism (the structure in which the end portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body 311) is provided on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311. It is formed in two places. Therefore, even when the drive on the one-side member 320L side and the drive on the other-side member 320R side deviate from each other, the movable mechanism located on the one-side member 320L side among the movable mechanisms formed in two places. The movable mechanism located on the side of the other side member 320R deforms in different forms (projection pins) according to the state of the guide or drive of the one side member 320L and the state of the guide or drive of the other side member 320L. 311a can be displaced within the elongated hole 314a).

  Therefore, the displacement on one side and the other side can be effectively absorbed by the interlocking of the movable mechanisms on the one side and the other side. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop the displacement member 310 from stopping.

  Next, a method of assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other-side member 320L when the rear-side view of the disassembled other-side member 320L is viewed. 28, illustration of the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 28, assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 includes mounting the drive motor 341 on the front of the intermediate base 332 and attaching the drive motor 341 to the respective gear shafts 332 c to 332 g on the rear of the intermediate base 332. After attaching the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363 to the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 to the gear shaft 332i (see FIG. 18 for the gear shafts 332c to 332i), the second rack 364 is inserted into its rack groove. The eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted into the transmission gear 365 and the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365 is meshed with the transmission gear 365.

  Next, after the roller 367 is placed on the back surface of the intermediate base 322 in a direction in which the flange portion 367a is brought into contact, the urging spring 366 is placed. The urging spring 366 is placed in a bent position while its other end is locked by a locking portion formed at the projecting end of the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332. At this stage, one end of the biasing spring 366 is not locked by the locking portion of the second rack 364, and is held between the roller 367 and a part of the gear train (gears 362a and 362b). You.

  In this case, the biasing spring 366 is in a no-load state (a state in which the free length is maintained), and thus can be stably held in a bent posture. In this case, a part of the gear train (gears 362a and 362b) is also used as a part for holding the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture, and thus a wall or the like for holding the biasing spring 366 is provided. It is not necessary to provide them, and accordingly, product cost can be reduced.

  After forming the state in which the transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 332 (the state shown in FIG. 28), the front of the rear base 331 faces the rear of the intermediate base 332, and the two are fastened and fixed. Finally, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 through the first opening 331c of the rear base 331. Thus, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is completed.

  The operation of locking one end of the biasing spring 366 to the locking portion of the second rack 364 uses, for example, a jig having a claw shape formed at the tip. Specifically, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked (held) by the tip of the jig inserted from the first opening 331c of the rear base 331, and the second rack is elastically deformed (extended) while the urging spring 366 is elastically deformed (extended). 364.

  Here, when the urging spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily secure an arrangement space, but to maintain the bent posture of the urging spring 366. It is difficult, and in the assembling process, a phenomenon occurs in which the biasing spring 366 is flipped (jumps by its own elastic recovery force). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 28 (that is, before the back base 331 is covered on the back side of the intermediate base 332), when one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364. Holds the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 with one hand so that the second rack 364 does not fall off while holding the urging spring 366 in a bent position, and holds the rear base 331 in the middle with the other hand. It is necessary to perform the work of covering the base 332, which is complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first opening 331 c is formed in a part of the back base 331 (a region including one end of the biasing spring 366), so that the back base 331 is provided on the back of the intermediate base 332. After being covered, one end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c. That is, since the rear base 331 is first covered, the rear base 331 is disposed so as to face the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 (that is, the rear base 331 is biased by the rear base 331 and the second rack 364). 364 can be held down), and the biasing spring 366 can be prevented from being flipped and the second rack 364 can be prevented from falling off. As a result, the work of connecting one end of the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 can be easily performed, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved.

  In addition, since the first opening 331c is formed in the rear base 331, not only the workability of the assembling operation (the operation of attaching the urging spring 366) can be improved, but also the urging spring 366 is improved. Can reduce sliding resistance during elastic deformation (expanding and contracting). That is, as described above, since the first opening 331c is formed in a region overlapping with the biasing spring 366 in the rear view of the rear base 331, the sliding between the biasing spring 366 and the rear base 331 is suppressed. Thus, the occurrence of resistance can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the biasing spring 366 from being hindered, so that the biasing force can be applied to the second rack 364 stably. Further, even when the biasing spring 366 is formed as a coil spring made of metal and the back base 331 is formed of a resin material, the first opening 331c is formed, so that the biasing spring 366 is formed. Abrasion of the back base 331 due to sliding can be suppressed, and as a result, dust generated due to abrasion can be suppressed from entering a mechanically movable unit or an electronic device such as a sensor device and exerting an adverse effect.

  Further, not only the first opening 331c corresponding to one end of the biasing spring 366 but also the second opening 331d corresponding to the other end of the biasing spring 366 are formed in the rear base 331. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the above-described sliding resistance and suppress abrasion.

  In this case, the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are formed linearly (that is, only in a region corresponding to the linear portion of the biasing spring 366). Therefore, a plate surface (a facing member facing the biasing spring 366) can be left at the bent portion of the biasing spring 366. Therefore, the opposing member is provided at a position necessary for maintaining the posture in which the biasing spring 366 is bent while ensuring the maximum formation area of the opening, the maximum effect of reducing the sliding resistance and suppressing the abrasion. Can be arranged.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the ring forming unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the ring forming unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the ring forming unit 400. FIGS. 29 and 30 show a state in which the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the ring forming unit 400 includes a one-side ring unit 410 </ b> L and another-side ring unit 410 </ b> R arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval and face each other. A pair of upper and lower annular divided bodies 440L1, 440L2, 440R1, and 440R2 are disposed in the units 410L and 410R, respectively. The ring forming unit 400 operates the ring units 410L and 410R to move the ring division bodies 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 29 to the center between the opposed ring units 410L and 410R (the ring). (Forming position) to form an annular shape at the annular forming position (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

  Here, the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R have a slight difference in shape, but the parts that exhibit technical functions are symmetrical except for the positioning mechanism (the center between the opposing centers). ), And the configuration is substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, the other annular unit 410R will be described as a representative example, and the one annular unit 410L will be described below. Is omitted. The positioning mechanism will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the other annular unit 410R, and FIG. 32 is a rear view of the other annular unit 410R. FIGS. 31 and 32 show a state in which the ring segments 440L1 and 440L2 are arranged at the ring forming positions.

  FIG. 33 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled other-side annular unit 410R when the disassembled other-side annular unit 410R is viewed from the front. FIG. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the ring unit 410R. FIGS. 33 and 34 correspond to a state in which the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the other-side annular unit 410R includes a rear base 420, a driving mechanism 430 disposed on the rear base 420, and an annular divided body 440R1 driven by the driving mechanism 430. , 440R2, a posture defining member 450 for regulating the posture of the annular divided bodies 440R1, 440R2, a suspension mechanism 460 for suspending and supporting the upper portion of the posture defining member 450 on the rear base 420, and a posture regulating member 450. It is mainly provided with a lower end guide mechanism 470 that guides the lower end, and a cover body 480 that covers the back base 420. Here, the back base 420 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the rear base 420. As shown in FIG. 35, the rear base 420 includes a main body portion formed in a vertically long shape in a front view, an upper protruding portion that protrudes sideways from an upper end of the main body portion, and an upper protruding portion. Also, a lower protruding portion that protrudes laterally from the main body portion at a lower position is formed in a substantially inverted F shape when viewed from the front.

  The rear base 420 has a motor shaft insertion window 421 formed in the main body thereof, and an upper rack shaft 422a, a lower rack shaft 422b, a gear shaft 423, an upper arm shaft 425a, and a lower arm shaft 426 from the front of the main body. Are respectively protruded. The motor shaft insertion window 421 is an opening for connecting the drive shaft of the drive motor 431 attached to the back of the back base 420 to the gear 361 of the drive mechanism on the front side of the back base 420.

  The upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are inserted into the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d of the third rack 433 of the drive mechanism (each shown in FIG. 36) to guide the linear movement of the third rack 433. Is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section. The diameters of the upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the width of the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d of the third rack.

  The gear shaft 423 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting a transmission gear 434 (see FIG. 36) of the drive mechanism. The upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 are connected to the upper arm of the drive mechanism. It is a cylindrical body having an annular cross section for rotatably supporting the rotation bases 435a and 436a (see FIG. 36) of the body 435 and the lower arm body 436, respectively.

  In addition, a cover body 480 is covered (fastened and fixed) on the front surface of the rear base 420 in a region corresponding to the upper rack shaft 422a, the gear shaft 423, and the upper and lower arm shafts 425, 426. The upper end of the third rack 433, the transmission gear 434, and the upper and lower arms 435, 436 (rotation bases 435a, 436a) are accommodated between the upper and lower surfaces of the third rack 433 (see FIG. 31).

  A suspending mechanism 460 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on the upper protruding portion of the rear base 420, and a lower end guide mechanism 470 is disposed on a lower end and a lower protruding portion of the main body of the rear base 420 (see FIG. (See FIG. 31 to FIG. 33). As will be described later, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported by the front (front) side of the rear base 420 in a horizontally slidable manner via a suspending mechanism 460, and the posture defining member 450 is moved in the horizontal direction. The rattling (swaying) in the front-rear direction when the slide is displaced is regulated by the lower end guide mechanism 470. The lower end of the third rack 433 and the gear 432 are accommodated between the lower end guide mechanism 470 and the back base 420 (see FIG. 31).

  Returning to FIGS. 31 to 34, the description will be continued. The drive mechanism 430 is a mechanism for displacing the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 by the drive force of the drive motor 431, and is fixed to the drive motor 431 attached to the rear surface of the rear base 420 and the drive shaft of the drive motor 431. Gear 432, a third rack 433 driven linearly by the gear 432, a transmission gear 434 rotationally driven by the linear movement of the third rack 433, and a rotation driven by the transmission gear 434. And an upper arm body 435 and a lower arm body 436. Here, the detailed configuration and operation of the drive mechanism 430 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36A is a front view of the driving mechanism 430 in a state in which the posture in which the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position is formed, and FIG. 36B is a ring-shaped divided body 440R1 and 440R2. FIG. 13 is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in a state where a posture for disposing the in the ring forming position is formed. In FIG. 36, the illustration of the drive motor 431 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), the third rack 433 is formed in a vertically long flat plate shape in a front view, and includes an upper rack portion 433a and a lower rack 433b, an upper guide groove 433c and a lower guide groove. 433d. The upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b are portions formed as racks by cutting the upper and lower side surfaces (the left side surface in FIG. 36 (a)) of the plate-like body. A transmission gear 434 is meshed with the upper rack 433b, and a gear 432 is meshed with the lower rack 433a.

  The upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d are openings through which the upper rack shaft 422a and the lower rack shaft 422b (see FIG. 35) of the rear base 420 are respectively inserted, and are adjacent to the upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b, respectively. At the positions where they are located, they extend linearly in the vertical direction (that is, in the longitudinal direction of the flat body (the third rack 433), that is, in the vertical direction in FIG. 36A) in parallel with the tooth surfaces.

  The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed as plate-shaped elongate bodies, and the rotation bases 435a and 436a are provided at the base end side of the elongate body, and the rotation connection parts 435b and 436b are provided at the tip end side of the elongate body. Are formed respectively.

  The rotation bases 435a and 436a are provided with circular shaft holes in a front view to be rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420, respectively, and along the outer peripheral surface. The gear is engraved. That is, the rotation bases 435 a and 436 a are formed as gears rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420. The gear at the rotation base 436a of the upper arm body 435 meshes with the gear at the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436, and the transmission gear 434 meshes with the gear at the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436.

  The rotation connecting portions 435b and 436b are portions connected to the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2, and as described later, are connected to the ring-shaped divided body via the arm connecting groove 451 (see FIG. 37) of the posture defining member 450. 440R1 and 440R2 are rotatably connected to rotating connection portions 441 (see FIG. 34) protruding from the rear surfaces.

  As shown in FIG. 36A, in a state where the driving mechanism 430 is in a state where the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position, the third rack 433 moves the lowermost part of the movable range (see FIG. 36A). 36, and the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are arranged so that their longitudinal directions extend along the vertical direction (that is, on an extension of a virtual line along the longitudinal direction of each arm body 435, 436). (The posture in which the arm shafts 425 and 426 of the rear base 420 are located).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the posture in which the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position is formed, the upper arm body 435 can be raised up to the vertical posture. As will be described later, the ring segment 440R1 can be sufficiently retracted rearward, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 431 can be suppressed.

  When the gear 432 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 36)) from the state shown in FIG. 36A by the driving force of the driving motor 431, the third rack 433 is rotated by the rotation of the gear 432. Is displaced upward (upward in FIG. 36A), and the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 36A.

  When the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 36 (a), the rotation of the transmission gear 434 causes the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 to rotate clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 36, and the rotation of the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 causes the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435 to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. As a result, while the distal end side (rotational connection part 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is lowered, the distal end side (rotational connection part 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is raised, and as shown in FIG. The posture which arrange | positions the ring division bodies 440R1 and 440R2 in a ring formation position is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 36B, in a state where the posture in which the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming position is formed, the third rack 433 is at the lowest position in the movable range (the lower side in FIG. 36). ). When the gear 432 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 36)) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 from this state, the rotation of the gear 432 is performed via the third rack 433 and the transmission gear 434. The rotation is transmitted to the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 and the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435 by the operation opposite to the above-described operation. As a result, the distal end side (rotational connection part 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is raised, while the distal end side (rotational connection part 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is lowered, and as shown in FIG. The posture which arrange | positions the ring division bodies 440R1 and 440R2 in a retracted position is formed.

  According to this embodiment, the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed with the rotation bases 435a and 436a at their base ends, and the gears of the rotation bases 435a and 436a are meshed with each other. In this state, the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be rotated in synchronization with each other because they are rotatably supported by the rear base 420. As a result, as described later, the ring division bodies 440R1 and 440R2 disposed on the distal end sides of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can accurately contact each other at the ring formation position (FIG. 31). And FIG. 32). In addition, if the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 is driven to rotate, the upper arm body 435 can also be rotated following the engagement of the rotation bases 435a and 436a. Therefore, two arms (upper and lower arm members 435 and 436) can be rotationally driven by one drive motor 431, and there is no need to provide a drive source for each arm, which reduces component costs and space efficiency. Can be improved.

  Returning to FIGS. 31 to 34, the description will be continued. The posture defining member 450 is a member for defining the posture of the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2. That is, when the ring segments R1 and 440R2 are displaced between the retracted position and the ring forming position, the ring segments R1 and 440R2 are slid in the left-right direction with the displacement of the ring segments R1 and 440R2, and the ring segment is displaced. The postures of the bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are maintained in a non-rotating state (that is, the bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced between the retracted position and the ring forming position while maintaining a parallel posture). Here, a detailed configuration of the posture defining member 450 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the posture defining member 450. Note that FIG. 37 illustrates a state in which the upper end of the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported by the suspension mechanism 460, and the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is guided by the lower end guide mechanism 470.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the posture defining member 450 has a front surface interposed between the distal ends (rotational connection portions 435b and 436b) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. It is a vertically long and flat plate-shaped member (see FIGS. 31 and 32), and a set of three grooves of an arm connecting groove 451 and a pair of posture defining grooves 452 positioned across the arm connecting groove 451 includes two vertically arranged members. A pair is formed.

  The arm connection groove 451 connects the rotation connection portions 435a and 436 of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 (see FIG. 36) to the rotation connection portions 441 of the ring split bodies 440R1 and 440R2 (see FIG. 34). The opening extends linearly along the vertical direction (ie, the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the posture defining member 450 by the suspension mechanism 460, the vertical direction in FIG. 37). The posture defining groove 452 is an opening through which the sliding shaft 442 (see FIG. 34) of the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 is inserted through the collar C, and is linearly formed in the vertical direction in parallel with the arm connecting shaft 451. Will be extended.

  The groove width of the arm connecting shaft 451 is such that the connecting portion between the rotary connecting portions 435a, 436 of the upper and lower arm members 435, 436 and the rotary connecting portions 441 of the ring segments 440R1, 440R2 is rotatable in the groove and along the groove. The width of the attitude defining groove 452 is set to a dimension that allows the sliding shaft 442 (collar C) of the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 to slide along the groove. .

  That is, the upper and lower arm members 435 and 436 are rotatably connected to the ring division members 440R1 and 440R2 via the arm connection shaft 451, while the ring division members 440R1 and 440R2 slide into the posture defining grooves 452. The insertion of the dynamic shaft 442 renders the posture defining member 450 unrotatable, while maintaining the vertical sliding displacement allowed. Therefore, as will be described later, when the upper and lower arm members 435 and 436 are rotated, the ring members 440R1 and 440R2 maintain their postures in a parallel state while the posture defining member 450 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. At the same time, it is vertically slid along the arm connecting shaft 451 and the posture defining groove 452 (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

  The suspending mechanism 460 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on a protruding portion (see FIGS. 31 and 35) of the rear base 420 and has a horizontally long flat plate-like base portion 461 in a front view, and is disposed on the base portion 461. And a guide rod 462 made of brass formed as a rod having a circular cross section. The guide rod 462 is arranged in a posture along the left-right direction in a state where the base portion 461 is disposed on the back base 420. Note that a cylindrical slider portion 453 is provided at the upper end of the posture defining member 450, and the guide rod 462 is inserted through the slider portion 453. As a result, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the rear base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 in a state where the posture defining member 450 can be slid in the left-right direction.

  The lower end guide mechanism 460 is a member disposed (fastened and fixed) at the lower end of the main body portion of the rear base 420 and the lower protruding portion (see FIGS. 31 and 35), and is disposed at the lower protruding portion of the rear base 420. A guide groove 471 is formed in the portion provided. The guide groove 471 is displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is displaced when the posture defining member 450 is rotated about the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460) at the lower end of the posture defining member 450. Is restricted to a predetermined range, and is formed as a substantially U-shaped concave groove which is open at the upper side (upper side in FIG. 37) and extends along a direction parallel to the guide rod 462. .

  The guide groove 471 has a groove width that is set to be larger than the plate thickness at the lower end of the posture defining member 450, and is provided at the front and back at the lower end of the posture defining member 450 suspended and supported by the suspension mechanism 460. On the other hand, the mutually facing inner side surfaces of the guide groove 471 are arranged at positions facing each other with a predetermined space therebetween. That is, the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471, and when the posture defining member 450 is in a stable state, the lower end of the posture defining member 450 does not contact the inner surface of the guide groove 471. Is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the rear base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 on the upper end side, and the lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, the resistance when the posture defining member 450 is slid in the left-right direction with respect to the back base 420 is suppressed, and the rotation of the upper and lower arms 435, 436 displaces the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 (FIG. 39 to FIG. 41) can be performed smoothly.

  For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are provided on the rear base 420 and the pair of guide shafts guide the upper end and the lower end of the posture defining member 450, respectively, two sliding portions are provided and friction resistance increases. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the sliding portion can be one, the frictional resistance when the posture defining member 450 slides can be suppressed. Further, according to the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is rotated about the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460 so that the lower end side of the posture defining member 450 is located on the inner surface of the guide groove 471 of the lower guide mechanism 470. Even if they are in contact with each other, since they are suspended and supported, the posture defining member 450 can be self-corrected to the posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the posture defining member 450 can be returned to a state in which the lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, also from this point, the frictional resistance when the posture defining member 450 slides can be reduced.

  Returning to FIGS. 31 to 34, the description will be continued. A rotary connecting portion 441 and a sliding shaft 442 project from the back surface of the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. As described above, the rotation connection portion 441 is connected to the rotation connection portions 435b and 436b of the upper and lower arm members 435 and 436 via the arm connection shaft 441 of the posture defining member 450, and the sliding shaft 442 is connected to the collar. Through C, it is inserted into the posture defining groove 452 of the posture defining member 450.

  Accordingly, the ring-shaped divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in the left-right direction together with the posture defining member 450 while being relatively displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the posture defining member 450 with the rotation of the upper and lower arms 435 and 436. Thus, while being kept in the parallel posture, the displaced portion is displaced along the arc-shaped trajectory between the retracted position and the ring formation position, and the ring division bodies 440L1, 440L2 and the ring division are formed at the ring formation position. The bodies 440R1 and 440R2 abut each other to form an annular shape (see FIG. 41).

  In this case, a positioning mechanism is formed on each of the contact surfaces of the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 so that the members displaced along the arc-shaped trajectory can be properly brought into contact with each other and a play after the contact is made. Sticking and wobbling can be suppressed. Here, with reference to FIG. 38, a description will be given of a positioning mechanism formed on the contact surface of the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2.

  The positioning mechanism is formed on each abutting surface of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2. Since they are all of the same configuration, the positioning mechanism is provided between the ring segment 440L1 and the ring segment 440R2. The positioning mechanism formed on the contact surface will be described as a representative example, and the description of the positioning mechanism formed on the other contact surfaces will be omitted.

  FIG. 38A is a partially enlarged side view of the ring segment 440L1 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIIa in FIG. 29, and FIG. 38B is a portion of the ring segment 440R1 in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 38 (c) is an enlarged side view, FIG. 38 (c) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring segment 440L1 taken along the line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc in FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the ring division body 440R1 in the XXXVIIId-XXXVIIId line.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (d), the positioning mechanism receives the positioning protrusion 491 protruding from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 440R1, and receives the positioning protrusion 491. A positioning recess 492 recessed on the contact surface (side surface) of the ring segment 440L1 as a possible recess, an engagement projection 492a projecting from the concave bottom surface of the positioning recess 492, and an engagement projection thereof The positioning projection 491 is formed as a recess that can receive the portion 492a and an engagement recess 491a that is recessed on the protruding tip surface.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (b) and 38 (d), the positioning projections 491 are tapered toward the protruding tip so that the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. 38 (d)) are tapered. Surface) and the front and rear side surfaces (the right side surface and the left side surface in FIG. 38 (b)) are formed as tapered surfaces that are inclined in such a direction that the distance between them becomes smaller toward the projecting tip. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the positioning concave portion 492 has a direction in which the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. 38 (a)) decrease in facing distance toward the concave bottom surface. It is formed as a tapered surface that is inclined. Accordingly, even when a positional shift occurs between the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1, the positioning convex parts 491 are inserted into the positioning concave parts 492 at the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. Easy to accept.

  The extension length of the positioning concave portion 492 (vertical length in FIG. 38A) is longer than the extending length of the positioning convex portion 491 (vertical length in FIG. 38B) (FIG. 38). (See (d)), these extending directions are directions corresponding to the arc-shaped trajectories of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 (that is, directions along the movement trajectory when the contact surface is viewed from the front). . Accordingly, when the ring segments 440L1 and 440R1 are brought close to each other along an arc-shaped locus to make contact surfaces come into contact with each other, one of the ring segments 440L1 and 440R1 precedes the other, and the two ring segments 440L1 and 440R1 both move ahead. Even in the case where a positional deviation occurs between them, it is possible to make it easier for the positioning concave portion 492 to receive the positioning convex portion 491 in the initial stage of bringing the contact surfaces into contact with each other.

  The engagement concave portion 491a and the engagement convex portion 492a are engaged with each other at the final stage of bringing the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 into contact with each other (concavo-convex fit), so that final positioning is achieved. The protrusion height of the engaging protrusion 492a is set to be smaller than the recess depth of the positioning recess 492, and the recess depth of the engaging recess 491a is The dimension is set smaller than the protruding height.

  Thereby, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning with relatively coarse positioning accuracy (relatively wide allowable range of positional deviation) is performed by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, while allowing the protruding tip of the positioning projection 491 to be reliably received in the positioning recess 492 and enabling subsequent smooth guiding to an appropriate positioning position, the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. In the final stage, the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a are engaged with each other to improve the positioning accuracy, appropriately form the annular shape, and reduce the rattling after the annular shape is formed. It is possible to perform two-stage positioning in which wobble can be reliably suppressed.

  The operation of the ring forming unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 39A and 39B are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit 400 in a state where the ring division bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions. 40B is a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit 400 in a state where the ring division bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are disposed between the retracted position and the ring forming position, and FIG. 41A and FIG. 41B is a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit 400 in a state where the ring division bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming position.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), at the retracted position, the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are in the state where they are most separated from each other. That is, the facing interval between the posture defining members 450 of the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R is maximized (that is, each posture defining member 450 is disposed at the most retracted position in the left-right direction). By doing so, the distance between the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 in the left-right direction is maximized. Further, in each of the posture defining members 450, the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are disposed at the upper end or the lower end, respectively, so that the distance between the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 and the annular divided bodies 440L2 and 440R2 in the vertical direction. Is the maximum.

  When the drive mechanism 430 is operated from this state to rotate the upper and lower arm members 435 and 436 respectively (see FIG. 36), each posture defining member 450 is moved in the left and right direction with the rotation of the upper and lower arm members 435 and 436. By being advanced respectively, the ring division bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the ring division bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in a direction to reduce the facing distance in the left and right direction, and the ring division is performed with respect to each posture defining member 450. The bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are lowered or raised, respectively, so that the distance between the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 and the annular divided bodies 440L2 and 440R2 in the vertical direction is reduced, and the state illustrated in FIG. 40 is formed.

  When the operation of the drive mechanism 430 is further advanced from the state shown in FIG. 40, each posture defining member 450 is arranged at the most advanced position in the left-right direction with the rotation of the upper and lower arms 435, 436, The ring segments 440L1 and 440L2 and the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in the left-right direction to positions where the contact surfaces come into contact with each other, and the ring segments 440L1 and 440R1 and the ring segment 440L2. 440R2 is displaced vertically (up or down) to a position where the contact surfaces of the 440R2 come into contact with each other. As a result, as shown in FIG. 41, the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions, and a ring shape is formed.

  As described above, according to the ring forming unit 400, the sliding displacement of the posture defining member 450 in the left-right direction by the suspension mechanism 460 and the annular divided bodies 440 </ b> L <b> 1 along the grooves 451 and 452 of the posture defining member 450. The sliding displacement of the 440R2 in the vertical direction allows the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 to be displaced along an arc-shaped trajectory while maintaining the attitude (parallel) of each, thereby forming an annular shape at the annular formation position.

  Here, as a mechanism for displacing each of the ring division bodies 440L1 to 440R2, a parallel link mechanism (a mechanism including a first arm and a second arm which are parallel to each other and have the same length) can also be used. It is possible to form an annular shape at the forming position. For example, focusing on the ring segment R1, the base ends of the first arm and the second arm are rotatably connected to the back base 420, and the distal ends of the first arm and the second arm are linked to the ring segment 440R1. By rotatably connecting and rotating the first arm and the second arm, the annular divided body 440R1 can be displaced while maintaining a constant posture. Therefore, by providing such a mechanism for each of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2, the ring can be formed at the ring forming position.

  However, in the structure using the parallel link mechanism as described above, since the interference between the first arm and the second arm occurs, it is not possible to sufficiently secure the operation range of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. For example, focusing on the ring segment 440R1, in the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 is tilted in the horizontal direction at the ring forming position (see FIGS. 36B and 41), and the upper arm body 435 is retracted at the retracted position. Similarly, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are tilted in the horizontal direction at the ring forming position, and the first arm and the second arm are retracted at the retracted position. In the vertical direction. In this case, in the parallel link mechanism, when the first arm and the second arm are raised and lowered at the retracted position, one arm interferes with the base end side of the other arm, and therefore cannot be raised in the vertical posture. . For this reason, the ring-shaped divided body 440R1 cannot be sufficiently retracted backward.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the back base 420, and the rotation of the annular divided body 440 R 1 with respect to the posture defining member 450 is restricted. The upper arm body 435 is rotatably connected to the rear base 420 while the distal end side is rotatably connected to the ring segment 440R1. The ring segment 440R1 is displaced while maintaining a constant posture. That is, unlike the case of the parallel link mechanism, two arms are not required, and it can be constituted by only one arm (upper arm body 435). As a result, no interference between the arms occurs, so that the upper arm body 435 can be raised up to the vertical posture (see FIG. 36A), and the annular divided body 440R1 is sufficiently retracted backward. Can be.

  Further, for example, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are inclined at the retracted position, so that the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 causes the first arm and the second arm to move in the inclination direction (that is, in the inclined direction). (In the direction of forming the ring forming position). Therefore, it is necessary to support the weight of the ring segment R1 by the driving force of the driving motor 431, and the energy consumption increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the upper arm body 435 can be in a vertically upright posture in the retracted position, the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 can be supported by the upper arm body 435. Therefore, the driving force of the driving motor 431 required to support the weight of the ring segment 440R1 (hold it at the retracted position) can be suppressed or unnecessary, and the energy consumption can be suppressed.

  When the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions shown in FIG. 41, positioning by the positioning mechanism is performed as described above (see FIG. 38).

  More specifically, a positioning projection 491 is projected from the contact surface of the ring segment 440R1, and a positioning recess 492 is recessed from the contact surface of the ring segment 440L1. Since the extension length of 492 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 38A) is set to be larger than the extension length of the positioning projection 491 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 38B), the annular divided body When 440L1 and 440R1 are displaced toward the ring forming position and their contact surfaces come close to each other, the positioning protrusion 491 is received (engaged) into the positioning recess 492 to perform positioning. it can.

  That is, since the contact surfaces of the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are close to each other along an arc-shaped (circular motion) trajectory, a convex shape is related to the concave shape and the convex shape having the same size. Cannot be combined. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the positioning concave portion 492 is extended as an elongated hole longer along the locus thereof than the positioning convex portion 491, so that the positioning concave portion 492 is provided in the positioning concave portion 492. 491 can be received (engaged).

  On the other hand, if only the positioning by the engagement of the positioning protrusion 491 and the positioning recess 492 is performed, the positioning is performed in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning recess 492 (the left and right direction in FIG. 38A and FIG. 41A). (Perpendicular to the paper). That is, even when the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 approach each other due to the arc-shaped regulation, the positioning concave portion 492 can receive the positioning convex portion 491, so that the positioning concave portion is larger than the extension length of the positioning convex portion 491. Since the extension length of the 492 is increased, the positioning protrusion 491 cannot be engaged in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492. Therefore, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492, and rattling or wobbling occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the engaging concave portion 491a is formed in the positioning convex portion 491 and the engaging convex portion 492a is formed in the positioning concave portion 492, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are produced. When it is arranged at the position, the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a can be engaged with each other. As a result, even in the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492, the positioning of the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 can be performed. And the occurrence of rattling and wobble can be suppressed.

  In addition, a structure in which the positioning protrusion 491 and the positioning recess 492 are omitted and the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are positioned only by the engagement recess 491a and the engagement protrusion 492a is also conceivable. However, in this case, it is difficult to receive (engage) the engaging projection 492a in the engaging recess 491a due to the elastic deformation of the upper arm body 435, the dimensional tolerance of the sliding portion and the rotating portion, and the like. Becomes On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the positioning convex portion 491 is first engaged with the positioning concave portion 492 to perform the first-stage positioning, and then the engagement concave portion 491a is covered as the second-stage positioning. Since the engagement convex portion 492a is engaged, the second-stage positioning (engagement of the engagement convex portion 492a with the engagement concave portion 491a) can be surely performed, and the above-described annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 can be formed. The occurrence of rattling and wobbling can be suppressed.

  That is, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning (first stage) in which positioning accuracy is relatively coarse (the allowable range of positional deviation is relatively wide) by the positioning protrusion 491 and the positioning recess 492. By doing so, it is possible to reliably receive the protruding tip of the positioning projection 491 into the positioning recess 492 and smoothly guide the subsequent positioning to the appropriate positioning position. In the final stage of contacting the two, the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a are engaged with each other (second-stage positioning), thereby increasing the positioning accuracy and appropriately forming the annular shape. The rattling and wobble after the formation of the annular shape can be reliably suppressed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 42A and 42B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a displacement member 2310 according to the second embodiment. FIGS. 42C and 42D are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state where relative displacement is formed by the ball joint mechanism.

  Note that FIG. 42A corresponds to a cross section taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 11B, and FIG. 42B corresponds to a cross section taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 11B. 42 (c) and 42 (d) correspond to the enlarged portions of FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), respectively.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the projecting pin 311a of the main body 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end portion 314 to connect the main body 311 and the end portion 314 so as to be relatively displaceable. The main body 2311 and the end side 2314 in the second embodiment are connected by a ball joint 2610 so as to be relatively displaceable. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (d), in the displacement member 2310 according to the second embodiment, the distance between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2311 and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. Are connected by a pair of upper and lower ball joints 2610. The ball joint 2610 is formed by connecting spheres (ball portions) at both ends with a rod-shaped body, and by bringing the spheres at both ends into spherical contact with socket portions formed at the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314, respectively. The part 2311 and the end side part 2314 are connected so as to be relatively rotatable in an arbitrary direction.

  In addition, the socket part of the main body part 2311 and the end side part 2314 is a cover in which the hemispherical spherical surface is recessed in the part where the hemispherical spherical surface is recessed on the back surface of the main body part 2311 and the front face of the end side part 2314. By covering the bodies 2311d and 2314d, they are formed by their spherical surfaces. Further, the cover bodies 2311a and 2314a are formed with tapered surfaces for avoiding interference with the rod-shaped body of the ball joint 2610.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the main body 2311 and the end side 2314 are connected via the ball joint mechanism, relative displacement can be smoothly performed in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 2310 is moved up and down, for example, the guide or drive by the one-side member 320L is different from the guide or drive by the other-side member 320R (for example, the one-side and the other-side slider S). In the case where there is a difference in the sliding resistance or the case where the driving force varies between the one side and the other side of the driving motor 341), and if there is a deviation between the two, the deviation is determined by the ball joint mechanism. It can be absorbed by the relative displacement between the main body 2311 and the end side 2314 (see FIG. 27). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 2310, and it is possible to suppress the load of each drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and stop the displacement member 2310 from stopping.

  In the displacement member 2310 according to the present embodiment, a biasing spring 2620 is provided between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 2311 and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. The biasing spring 2620 is formed as a coil spring, and is interposed between the main body 2311 and the end side 2314 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 2620 acts as a force for keeping the facing distance between the main body 2311 and the end side 2314 constant.

  As described above, when the main body 2311 and the end side 2314 are relatively displaced via the ball joint mechanism in order to absorb the above-described displacement by providing the urging spring 2620, the main body 2311 and the end side portion 2314 can be returned to the initial position by the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the urging spring 2620.

  Note that the biasing spring 2620 is disposed with a ball joint 2620 (a rod-shaped body) inserted therethrough. As a result, a mechanism for holding the biasing spring 2620 so as not to fall off can be used also for the ball joint 2610, and it is not necessary to separately provide a holding mechanism, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the cost of parts. And can be achieved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 43A and 43B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a displacement member 3310 according to the third embodiment. FIGS. 43C and 43D are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state where the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is elastically deformed.

  Note that FIG. 43A corresponds to a cross section taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 11B, and FIG. 43B corresponds to a cross section taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d) correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), respectively.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the projecting pin 311a of the main body 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end portion 314 to connect the main body 311 and the end portion 314 so as to be relatively displaceable. The main body part 2311 and the end side part 2314 in the third embodiment are connected by a rubber-like elastic body 3630 so as to be relatively displaceable. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, in the displacement member 3310 according to the third embodiment, the distance between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314. Are connected by a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630. The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is formed in a cylindrical shape from an elastomer, and connects the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in a state where the rubber-like elastic body 3630 can be relatively rotated in an arbitrary direction by being elastically deformed. Note that the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is disposed in such a manner that the axial direction thereof is perpendicular to the back surface of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the main body 3311 and the end side 3314 are connected via the rubber-like elastic body 3630, relative displacement can be smoothly performed in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 3310 is moved up and down, for example, the guide or drive by the one-side member 320L is different from the guide or drive by the other-side member 320R (for example, the one-side and the other-side slider S). In the case where there is a difference in the sliding resistance or the case where the driving force varies between the drive motor 341 on one side and the other side), and when there is a deviation between the two, the deviation is determined by the rubber-like elastic material. The body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 can be absorbed by being relatively displaced by the elastic deformation of the 3630 itself (see FIG. 27). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 3310, and it is possible to suppress the load of each drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and the displacement member 3310 from stopping.

  Further, when the main body 3311 and the end side 3314 are relatively displaced by the elastic deformation of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 in order to absorb the above-described displacement, the main body 3311 and the end side 3314 are made to have rubber-like elasticity. The body 3630 can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is made of an elastomer, the vibration of the main body 3311 and the end side portion 3314 is quickly converged by utilizing the viscosity characteristics (damping effect) of the elastomer. Can be. As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 from causing a difference between the guide or drive by the one-side member 320L and the guide or drive by the other-side member 320R. The occurrence of displacement can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A is a rear view of the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 44B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 4310 taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, a case will be described in which a drive motor 341 is disposed on each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 are driven (two-sided drive). However, in the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 is provided only on the one side member 320L (that is, the drive motor 341 on the other side member 320R is omitted), and only one longitudinal side of the displacement member 4310 is driven. (One-sided drive). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The displacement member 4310 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the displacement member 310 according to the first embodiment in that a movable mechanism (an end portion 314 with respect to the main body 4311 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44A)). Only the structure of the first rack 4315 is different from that of the first rack 4315, and the other structures are the same. In the following, only different configurations will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment projects from the rear surface on the other longitudinal side (the left side in FIG. 44 (a)) of the main body 4311. The number of the projecting pins 311a is set to one. The position of the protruding pin 311a on the other side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 44A) is a pair of upper and lower positions disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 44A). The intermediate position of the protruding pin 311a.

  On the other hand, a shaft support hole 4314a is formed in only one location on an end side portion 4314 connected to the other longitudinal side (the left side in FIG. 44A) of the main body portion 4311. The shaft support hole 4314a is a circular hole having a circular shape in a front view for receiving the protruding pin 311a on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 4311, and has an inner diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion of the collar C. Is set. Therefore, the protruding pin 311a is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 4314a via the collar C.

  That is, as described above, on one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 44A), the main body 311 is relatively displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (the long-diameter direction of the long hole 314a) with respect to the end side portion 314. On the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 44 (a)), only rotation about the projecting pin 311a is allowed as a relative displacement with respect to the end side 4314 of the main body 4311. You.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first rack 4315 disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 44A) is provided with the slider holding portion 315 with the omission of the drive motor 341 for the other side member 320R. (Ie, the rack 315a is omitted). Accordingly, the displacement member 4310 is guided along the guide rod P on one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 44A) and is driven by the one-side member 320L (the drive motor 431), whereas the displacement member 4310 is moved in the longitudinal direction. The other side (the left side in FIG. 44A) is only guided along the guide rod P, and is not driven by the other side member 320R (drive motor 431).

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since the displacement member 4310 is formed as one-side drive for driving only one side in the longitudinal direction, the drive motor 341 of the other member 320R and its driving force are transmitted to the first rack 4315. Therefore, the transmission mechanism can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 4310 is moved up and down, since the one-side drive is performed, the guide by the one-side member 320L and the guide by the other-side member 320R are the guide on the drive side and the guide on the driven side. And their states are different from each other. Therefore, if the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portions 314 and 4314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 4311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the above-described movement when the displacement member 4310 is raised and lowered is described above. The displacement cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form a relative displacement in a different form (the permissible relative displacement is made different). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

  Specifically, the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction on the driven side (the left side in FIG. 44A) allows only relative rotation with respect to the end side portion 4314 of the main body 4311 while the longitudinal direction on the driving side The movable mechanism on one side (the right side in FIG. 44A) allows relative rotation and relative displacement (slide displacement) with respect to the end side 4314 of the main body 4311.

  As a result, both the movable mechanisms can assume a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively, and the displacement generated between the guide by the one side member 320L and the guide by the other side member 320R. Can be effectively absorbed as the entire displacement member 4310. As a result, even with one-sided driving, the displacement member 4310 can be displaced stably, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the drive motor 341 and stop the displacement member 4310 from stopping.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a rear view of the displacement member 5310 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. FIG. 45C is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 taken along line XLVc-XLVc in FIG.

  In the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, one-side drive is employed, and a movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (the end side portion 3314 is relatively displaceable with respect to the main body 5311). Are different from each other. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The displacement member 5310 according to the fifth embodiment is configured such that the movable member on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (the end portion 3314 is relatively displaceable with respect to the main body 5311) with respect to the displacement member 310 according to the first embodiment. Only the structure differs from the structure of the first rack 3315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 45A), and the other structures are the same. In the following, only different configurations will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (b), in the displacement member 5310 according to the fifth embodiment, the rear surface and the end side portion 3314 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 5311 (the right side in FIG. 45 (a)). A pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 are provided between the front and the front, and a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies are provided between the back of the main body 5311 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. Each is connected by a body 5630. That is, it is the same as in the third embodiment. However, the rubber-like elastic body 5630 is formed in the same shape as the rubber-like elastic body 3630, but the rubber hardness is set to a value (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630, and the spring constant is high. (It is hard to deform).

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, similarly to the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other member 320R is omitted, and accordingly, it is disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 45A). The first rack 4315 having only the slider holding portion 315c is formed (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

  Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other-side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the first rack 4315 can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, if the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end portion 3314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 5311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member 5310 The above-mentioned displacement when the robot is raised and lowered cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form a relative displacement in a different form (the permissible relative displacement is made different). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

  More specifically, the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 5630 that constitutes the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 45 (a)) on the driven side is the same as that on the other side in the longitudinal direction on the driving side (FIG. The right side) is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 constituting the movable mechanism (right side), so that the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction) is less likely to be deformed than the drive side (constant). The amount of deformation allowed when an external force is applied can be reduced).

  As a result, both the movable mechanisms can assume a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively, and the displacement generated between the guide by the one side member 320L and the guide by the other side member 320R. Can be effectively absorbed as the entire displacement member 5310. As a result, even with one-sided driving, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 5310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the drive motor 341 and stop the displacement member 5310 from stopping.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 46A and 46B are front views of a displacement member 6310 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG. 46A illustrates a state where the displacement member 6310 is being driven to move upward, and FIG. 46B illustrates a state where the displacement member 6310 is being driven to move downward. In FIGS. 46A and 46B, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 in a front view (hereinafter, referred to as “center of gravity position G”) is schematically illustrated using a black circle.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 313 has its center of gravity at the center of rotation has been described. However, the rotating body 6313 of the sixth embodiment has its center of gravity G eccentric from the center of rotation, and It is formed so that the position of the center of gravity can be changed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The displacement member 6310 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the displacement member 310 according to the first embodiment in that a rack portion 315a is provided from the first rack on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIGS. 46A and 46B). The only difference is that they are omitted, and that the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric. The other configurations are the same as each other. In the following, only different configurations will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 46A to 46B, in the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment, the position G of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 is set to a position eccentric from the center of rotation of the rotating body 6313. . Therefore, the rotating body 6313 changes its rotational position (phase) to cause the center of gravity position G to be eccentric to the left as viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 46A, or to FIG. 46B. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, in the displacement member 6310, the position of the center of gravity of the entire main body 311 can be adjusted (shifted) to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction.

  In addition, the rotating body 6313 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a rotationally symmetric shape having a center of rotation as a symmetric point, and a metal weight is disposed at an eccentric position inside, so that the center of gravity is The position G is formed so as to be eccentric from the center of rotation. Therefore, in the appearance of the rotating body 6313, the player can visually recognize the center of gravity G of the rotating body 6313 so as to be located at the rotation center of the rotating body 6313.

  Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 for the other-side member 320R is omitted, and accordingly, the drive motor 341 is disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 46A). A first rack (not shown) is formed having only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

  Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other-side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the first rack can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, if the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 6311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction because of the one-side drive, the displacement member 6310 The above-mentioned displacement at the time of ascending and descending cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by rotating the rotating body 6313 and adjusting the position of the center of gravity G in the left-right direction, the position of the center of gravity of the entire displacement member 311 is set to be greater than the center of the displacement member 311 in the longitudinal direction. It can be biased (moved) to one side or the other (ie, the drive side or the driven side).

  Therefore, when the displacement member 6310 is stopped, the effect is produced by rotating the rotating body 6313. On the other hand, when the displacement member 6310 is displaced (elevated or lowered), the rotating body 6313 is brought to a predetermined rotational position (phase). By disposing and displacing the position of the center of gravity of the entire displacement member 311, the weight acting on the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction are adjusted, and the above-described displacement is absorbed. An easy state can be formed.

  Here, if the displacement direction (ascending or descending) of the displacement member 6310 is different, the influence of gravity changes, and the state required for each movable mechanism changes. That is, for example, focusing on the driven side, the state of being guided along the guide rod P is changed between a rising time where displacement is performed against gravity and a falling time where displacement is assisted by gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, for example, when the displacement member 6310 is raised, the drive side (one side in the longitudinal direction, the left side in FIG. 46A) The center-of-gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism on the other hand, and when the displacement member 6310 is lowered, the center-of-gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism on the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 46B). Accordingly, the weight acting on the movable mechanism on the driving side and the movable mechanism on the driven side can be adjusted according to the displacement direction (up or down) of the displacement member 6310, and the above-described displacement is more easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 6310 even if the driving mechanism is one-sided and the movable mechanism is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. It is possible to suppress the load of the 341 from becoming excessive and stop the displacement member 6310 from stopping.

  The center of gravity G of the rotating body 6313 does not need to be maintained at the fixed position while the displacement member 6310 is being displaced (up or down), and the center of gravity G may be adjusted during the displacement. For example, when the driving of the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431 is started and during a predetermined period from the start, the center of gravity G is moved toward (or away from) the drive side (one longitudinal end, the left side in FIG. 46A). On the other hand, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the driving of the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431, the center of gravity position G is moved closer to (or away from) the driven side (the other end in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 46A). ) Form is exemplified.

  The position of the center of gravity G adjusted by the rotation of the rotating body 6313 is not limited to the position (left or right in front view) shown in FIGS. ) Can be set.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 are front views of the vertical slide unit 7300 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 47 illustrates a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the ascending position, and FIG. 48 illustrates a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the descending position.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side part 314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body part 311) is always effective is described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the movable mechanism can be fixed. (Relative displacement of the end portion 314 with respect to the main body 311 can be regulated). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the vertical slide unit 7300 in the seventh embodiment, regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD are provided on the front surface of the front base 333 of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 329R. The regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD fix the movable mechanism (a structure that enables the end side portion 314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body 311) when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position. This is a structure for regulating the relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329. The regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the ascending position. Restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD are disposed on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 disposed at the lowered position.

  The regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD disposed at these four locations have substantially the same configuration except that they are disposed in a symmetrical or up-down symmetrical posture with respect to each other. Is described as a representative example, and description of the other regulating mechanisms 7640LD, 7640RU, 7640RD is omitted.

  The regulating mechanism 7640LU includes an arm 7641 rotatably disposed on the front base 333, a torsion spring 7742 for applying an urging force for rotating the arm 7641, and an urging force applied from the torsion spring 7642. And a holder (not shown) for restricting the rotation of the arm body 7641 due to the above and holding the arm at an initial position.

  A roller 7641a is rotatably supported at the distal end of the arm body 7641. The torsion spring 7642 urges the arm body 7641 in a rotational direction (clockwise (clockwise) in the regulating mechanism 7640LU in FIGS. 47 and 48) in which the tip (the roller 7641a) is separated from the main body 311 of the displacement member 310. . The holder regulates the rotation of the arm 7641 due to the urging force of the torsion spring 7542, and moves the arm 7641 to the initial position (the direction connecting the rotation center of the arm 7641 and the rotation center of the roller 7641a to the front base 333). (In the case of the regulating mechanism 7640LU, the posture shown in FIG. 48).

  A decoration portion is formed on the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 along the upper and lower side edges thereof, and a roller receiving portion 7311e is provided at one end of the decoration portion in the longitudinal direction with a one-side member 320L. At the front side of the front base 311.

  The roller receiving portion 7311e extends in a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 47 and 48) to a position overlapping the roller 7641a of the arm 7641, and a side surface on a side facing the arm 7641 approaches the regulating mechanism 7640. (In the regulating mechanism 7640LU in FIG. 47, the inclination is increased from the base end to the tip end). In addition, a curved surface is formed at the base end of the side surface on the side facing the arm body 7641 so as to be able to abut on the outer periphery of the roller 7641a, and the curved surface holds the roller 7641a.

  When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 47 and approaches the lowered position, the side surface (the lower side surface in FIG. 47) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 becomes the roller 7641a of the arm body 7641a of the regulating mechanism 7640LD, 7640RD. When the displacement member 310 is further lowered, the roller 7641a is rolled along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311 so that the arm body 7641 is gradually tilted from the initial position, and the displacement is caused. When the member 310 is arranged at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 48, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (the base end curved surface) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311.

  Accordingly, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched from the left and right by the right and left arm bodies 7641 of the right and left regulating mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD, so that the movable mechanism is fixed, and the main body 311 is moved in the left-right direction with respect to the end side 314 of the main body 311. (I.e., the sliding displacement of the protruding pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end portion 314) is restricted.

  On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 48, when the displacement member 310 is raised and approaches the raised position, the side surface (the upper side surface in FIG. 48) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 is connected to the arm body 7641 of the regulating mechanism 7640LU, 7640RU. When the displacement member 310 is further raised while being in contact with the roller 7641a, the roller 7641a is rolled along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311 so that the arm body 7641 is gradually tilted from the initial position. When the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, as shown in FIG. 47, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (the base curved surface) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311.

  Thus, as in the case described above, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched from the left and right by the left and right arm bodies 7641 of the left and right regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU, whereby the movable mechanism is fixed, and the end of the main body 311 is fixed. Relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the side portion 314 (that is, sliding displacement of the protruding pin 311a along the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD, and the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be regulated. Thus, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

  That is, while the rotating body 313 is held by the main body 311, the main body 311 is connected to the end side part 314 by a movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 occurs, and not only rotation of the rotating body 313 is hindered, but also movable parts may be worn or damaged due to the rattling or wobbling.

  On the other hand, since the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), the rotating body 313 is displaced in a stable state with the rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 suppressed. be able to. As a result, wear and breakage of the movable part can be suppressed. In particular, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 6313 is configured to be eccentric with respect to the center of rotation as in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 46), the configuration of the present embodiment is effective.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD act on the arm 4671 by displacing the displacement member 310 to the displacement end (elevated position or lowered position), so that the movable mechanism is fixed. To form That is, the movable mechanism is fixed (the arm body 7641 is tilted) by using the displacement (elevation and descent) of the displacement member 310, so that there is no need to separately provide a driving unit for fixing the movable mechanism, and the displacement member The drive motor 341 for displacing (elevating and lowering) 310 can also be used as a drive unit for causing the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 47, the upper regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU automatically return their arm bodies 7641 to the initial position by the urging force of the torsion spring 7642 ( Similarly, when the displacement member 310 is raised from the lowered position shown in FIG. 48, the lower regulating mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD move their arm members 7641 to the initial position by the urging force of the torsion spring 7642. Automatically returned to (see FIG. 47). That is, the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD can be automatically returned to the position (initial position) shielded by the front base 333, and can be made invisible to the player.

  In addition, since the roller receiving portion 7311e is formed as a part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 (that is, a part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 is formed by the roller portion 7311e), the arm body 7641 is tilted. Mechanism for the player can be made inconspicuous to the player.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 49 and 50 are front views of the vertical slide unit 8300 in the eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 49 illustrates a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the ascending position, and FIG. 50 illustrates a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the descending position. FIGS. 49 and 50 show a state in which the front base 333 has been removed from the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R.

  In the seventh embodiment, a case where the arm body 7641 of the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD clamps the main body 311 from the left and right to fix the movable mechanism (regulate the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 314) will be described. However, in the regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD of the eighth embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by inserting the insertion portion 8642 between the main body portion 311 and the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the end side portion 314 so as to face each other ( The relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 is regulated). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, in the vertical slide unit 8300 according to the eighth embodiment, regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD are provided on the front surface of the intermediate base 332 of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 329R. The regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD fix the movable mechanism (a structure that enables the end side portion 314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body 311) when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the ascending position or the descending position. This is a structure for restricting the relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329. The restricting mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 disposed at the ascending position. Restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD are arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the lowered position.

  Although the regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD disposed at these four locations have different shapes, the configurations and operations thereof to be inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are substantially the same. Therefore, the regulating mechanism 8640LU disposed above the one side member 320L will be described as a representative example, and the description of the other regulating mechanisms 8640LD, 8640RU, 8640RD will be omitted.

  The regulating mechanism 8640LU projects from the base 8641 projecting from the front of the intermediate base 332 and the projecting tip of the base 8641 toward the displacement member 310 (in the regulating mechanism 8640LU, downward in FIG. 49). And an insertion portion 8642. That is, the insertion portion 8642 is raised by the base portion 8641 to a height position facing the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b, and the gap between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b in the vertical direction (FIGS. 49 and 50). Is arranged at a position overlapping with. The thickness of the insertion portion 8642 is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b.

  When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 49 and then approaches the lowered position, the displacement member 310 is inserted through the regulating mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD below the space between the opposing surfaces of the main body 311 and the end surfaces 314b, 311b and 314b. When the displacement member 310 is further lowered and disposed at the lowered position, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b, as shown in FIG.

  As a result, in the displacement member 310, the gap between the stopper surface 311b of the main body 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (a gap for relative displacement) is filled by the insertion portions 8642 of the regulating mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD. Thus, the movable mechanism is fixed, and the relative displacement of the main body 311 in the left-right direction with respect to the end side portion 314 (that is, the sliding displacement of the protruding pin 311a along the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is regulated. You.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 50 and approaches the ascending position, the restricting mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU are inserted above the space between the opposing surfaces of the main body 311 and the end surfaces 314 between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b. When the portion 8642 faces and the displacement member 310 is further raised and arranged at the raised position, as shown in FIG. 49, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b.

  Thus, similarly to the above-described case, the displacement member 310 has a gap between the stopper surface 311b of the main body 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (a gap for relative displacement) of the regulating mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU. The movable mechanism is fixed by being buried by the insertion portion 8642, and the main body 311 is relatively displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the end side portion 314 (that is, the protruding pin 311a along the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314). Slide displacement) is regulated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD, and the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be regulated, so that rattling and wobbling are suppressed. Thus, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

  That is, while the rotating body 313 is held by the main body 311, the main body 311 is connected to the end side part 314 by a movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 occurs, and not only rotation of the rotating body 313 is hindered, but also movable parts may be worn or damaged due to the rattling or wobbling.

  On the other hand, since the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), the rotating body 313 is displaced in a stable state with the rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 suppressed. be able to. As a result, wear and breakage of the movable part can be suppressed. In particular, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 6313 is configured to be eccentric with respect to the center of rotation as in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 46), the configuration of the present embodiment is effective.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the restricting mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD allow the insertion member 8642 to be inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b by displacing the displacement member 310 to its displacement end (up position or down position). Thus, a state where the movable mechanism is fixed is formed. That is, the movable mechanism is fixed by using the displacement (elevation and descent) of the displacement member 310 (the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the opposing surfaces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b), so that the driving means for fixing the movable mechanism is used. Need not be provided separately, and the drive motor 341 for displacing (elevating and lowering) the displacement member 310 can also be used as a driving means for causing the regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52 are front views of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 9331 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 51 corresponds to the state of FIG. 22, and FIG. 52 corresponds to the state of FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (inclined) with respect to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, thereby allowing the second rack 364 to be inclined. Although the posture of the second rack 364 of the ninth embodiment is suppressed, the magnetic force of the magnets 9652a to 9652e is applied in a direction in which the second rack 364 is not parallel (inclined) to the direction of the linear movement. Thus, the posture is suppressed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the back base 9331 has a vertically elongated main body portion and a protrusion extending laterally from the lower end of the main body portion, as in the first embodiment. A metal rod 9651 is disposed on the side of the main body (on the side of the projecting portion). The metal rod 9651 is a metal rod-shaped body, and is disposed in such a posture that its longitudinal direction is along the direction of linear movement of the second rack 364.

  In the second rack 364, a plurality of magnets 9652a to 9652e are arranged on the side facing the metal bar 9651 provided on the rear base 9331, respectively, and the metal bar 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e are provided. It is formed to attract by magnetic force. That is, a magnetic force is applied (operated) to the second rack 364 in a direction to urge the lower end of the second rack 364 toward the opposite side (the left side in FIG. 51) to the second pinion 365a.

  Therefore, as in the case of the first embodiment, the tooth surface of the second rack 364 can be brought close to the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a, so that the gap between these two tooth surfaces can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when transmitting the driving force from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth surfaces, and to improve the responsiveness. In addition, it is possible to suppress the abrasion of the tooth surface due to the collision between the tooth surfaces immediately after the transmission of the driving force from the stop state (the initial stage of meshing), and to suppress the tooth surface from being damaged. Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing (engaging) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained at a constant level.

  In the first embodiment in which the urging spring 366 is formed as a coil spring, the second rack 364 is repeatedly operated to deteriorate (set) and change the urging force. For example, since the urging force applied to the second rack 364 uses the magnetic force of a magnet, a stable urging force can be applied to the second rack 364 for a long period of time.

  Here, in the present embodiment, all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651 in a state where the second rack 364 is located at the lowest position in the movable range as shown in FIG. 51. On the other hand, in a state where the second rack 364 is located at the uppermost position of the movable range as shown in FIG. 52, all the magnets 9652a to 9652e are retracted to a position where they do not face the metal rod 9651.

  Therefore, the period during which the second rack 364 rises from the state located at the lowermost position of the movable range shown in FIG. 51 to the first position (the position where the facing of the leading magnet 9652a and the metal bar 9651 is maintained) (hereinafter referred to as “the In one period, all magnets 9652a to 9652e face metal rod 9651, so that a constant magnetic force can be applied to second rack 364.

  A period (hereinafter, referred to as a “second period”) in which the second rack 364 rises from the first position to the second position (a position at which the face between the tail magnet 9652 e and the metal bar 9651 is interrupted) is referred to as a “second period”. With the displacement (elevation), the number (area) of the magnets 9652a to 9652e facing the metal rod 9651 is gradually reduced, so that the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be gradually reduced.

  During a period during which the second rack 364 rises from the second position to a position at the top of the movable range shown in FIG. 52 (hereinafter, referred to as a “third period”), all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651. Since the second rack 364 is eliminated, a state in which a magnetic force is not substantially applied to the second rack 364 can be formed.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be applied while being adjusted to a size suitable for the state of the second rack 364. Specifically, in the first period in which the driving of the second pinion 365a by the second rack 364 is started, a larger magnetic force (magnetic force exceeding a reference value) is applied to the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is moved. While the rattle is less likely to be rattled, the posture is prevented from being violated (stabilizing the transmission of the driving force to the second pinion 365a), while the driving of the second pinion 365a by the second rack 364 starts. In the third period after the power supply enters the stable state, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 is reduced (to be equal to or less than the reference value) or the magnetic force is not applied to the second rack 364, thereby driving the second rack 364. , The energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the second period is provided between the first period and the third period, it is possible to avoid a sudden change (decrease) in the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364, and gradually reduce the magnetic force. Since it can be reduced, the transition from the first period to the third period can be performed smoothly, and the attitude of the second rack 364 can be stabilized.

  Note that the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e may be arranged in reverse (the back base 331 and the second rack 364). Further, a magnet may be provided instead of the metal rod 9651. When a magnet is provided, a magnetic force in the attracting direction may be used, or a magnetic force in the repelling direction may be used. These also provide the same effects as in the present embodiment.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other-side member 320L in the tenth embodiment, and illustrates an exploded state. FIGS. 54A and 54B are perspective rear views of the other-side member 320L, and illustrate an assembled state. 53 and 54, illustration of the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 is omitted. FIG. 54A shows a state before the roller 10367 is mounted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the locking of the one end of the biasing spring 366 and the locking portion of the second rack 364 is performed after the rear base 331 is covered by the intermediate base 332 has been described. One end of the biasing spring 366 in the embodiment is locked to a locking portion of the second rack 364 before the intermediate base 332 covers the rear base 331. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the tenth embodiment, a substantially J-shaped slit portion 10331e as viewed from the front extends to a portion where the extension lines of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d cross each other on the rear base 10331. Is established. The slit portion 10331e is formed into a U-shape at the end of a portion (first guide portion) linearly extending as a groove having a constant width, starting from a portion opened at the side edge of the back base 10331, The end of the linearly extended portion (second guide portion) is formed as a slit that terminates.

  The height of the side wall of the intermediate base 10332 on the inner side of the bent portion (the portion where the main body portion and the protruding portion intersect) is reduced as compared with the case of the first embodiment. Interference with the biasing spring 366 is suppressed.

  The roller 10367 is formed in a disk shape and is opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, with a first flange portion 10367a, a second flange portion 10367b, and a third flange portion 10367c, and a first flange portion 10367a and a second flange portion. A cylindrical shaft portion 10367d connecting between the portions 10367b and a cylindrical contact portion 10367e connecting between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c, and these portions 10367a to 10367e are concentric. It is formed integrally in a certain posture.

  The shaft portion 10363d is a portion that is inserted into the slit portion 10331e of the rear base 10331 and is rotatably held (supported) at the end of the slit portion 10331e, and has an outer diameter equal to the groove width of the slit portion 10331e. Or set to slightly smaller dimensions. The contact portion 10367e is a portion that forms a bent posture of the biasing spring 366 by contacting the outer peripheral surface between one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366.

  The opposing interval between the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the thickness of the back base 10331, and the opposing interval between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c is biased. The size is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the spring 366. Therefore, as will be described later, when the shaft portion 10367 is inserted into the slit portion 10331e, the back base 10331 is sandwiched between the opposing faces of the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b, and the roller 10367 moves in the axial direction. Movement is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 53, as in the case of the first embodiment, assembling of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 in the tenth embodiment includes mounting the drive motor 341 on the front surface of the intermediate base 10332 and On the rear surface of the intermediate base 332, after attaching the gears 362a to 362e to the gear shafts 332c to 332g, the crank gear 363 to the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 to the gear shaft 332i, respectively (for the gear shafts 332c to 332i). 18), and the second rack 364 is disposed with the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 inserted in the rack groove 364b and meshed with the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365.

  Next, in the tenth embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, and the other end is fixed to the locking portion formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion of the intermediate base 332. Lock. In this case, in this embodiment, since the urging spring 366 is set to be in a no-load state (a state where the free length is maintained), both ends of the urging spring 366 are locked. However, such a state can be stably maintained.

  After forming the state in which the transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 10332 (the state shown in FIG. 53), the front of the rear base 10331 is opposed to the rear of the intermediate base 10332, and the two are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 53). 54 (a)), and finally, by attaching the roller 10377 to the slit portion 10331e of the rear base 10331 (see FIG. 54 (b)), the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 is completed. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the rear base 10331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 10332, the rear base 10331 is bridged between the bent portions (between the main body portion and the overhang portion). Since the urging spring 366 is extended, the urging spring 366 is sandwiched between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c of the roller 10367, and the shaft portion 10368d of the roller 10367 is connected to the slit portion 10331 of the rear base 10331. Through the opening (start end), and push the roller 10367 into the folded portion of the slit portion 10331. As a result, the urging spring 366 is extended and bent, and as shown in FIG. 54B, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 presses the roller 10367 against the end of the slit portion 10331e and holds it. can do.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the biasing spring 366 is disposed in a bent posture by displacing the roller 10367 while abutting it between one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366. Thus, the assembling work of the biasing spring 366 can be facilitated. That is, in a state where the rear base 10331 is covered by the intermediate base 10332 (that is, in a state where the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the rear base 10331), the urging spring 366 is in a bent posture. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the biasing spring 366 from being flipped and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, the work of assembling the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture can be easily performed, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be increased.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 can be used not only as the urging of the second rack 364 but also as a holding force for holding the roller 10367. There is no need to separately prepare a member (for example, a fastening screw), and it is not necessary to perform a fastening operation. Therefore, the number of parts and the number of assembling steps can be reduced accordingly.

  Furthermore, the roller 10367 is rotatably held by the shaft portion 10367d being pressed against the end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 366. Therefore, there is no need to protrude from the rear base 10331 or the intermediate base 10332 a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the roller 10367. Therefore, it is not necessary to cover the rear base 10331 on the intermediate base 10332 while inserting the shaft-like body through the roller 10368 (see FIG. 28), and from this point, the efficiency of the assembly operation can be improved. .

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 11300 according to the eleventh embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the second rack 364 of the one-side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other-side member 320R are respectively urged by different urging springs 366 has been described. The second rack 364 of the side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R are urged by one urging spring 11366. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has one end locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. Bias spring 11366 to be provided. The biasing spring 11366 is disposed in a symmetrical posture by a roller 11661 abutting on a center position between one end and the other end.

  Note that the protruding ends of the protruding portions of the one-side member 11320L and the other-side member 11320R are notched, and an urging spring 11366 is installed on the interposition member 11370 via the notched portion. . The roller 1161 is rotatably disposed on the interposition member 11370, and the interposition member 11370 is positioned such that a lower portion where the biasing spring 11366 is installed is recessed toward the front side (the back side in the paper of FIG. 55). The biasing spring 11366 can be arranged in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the paper surface in FIG. 55) as a whole from one end to the other end.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the second rack 364 of the one-side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other-side member 320R are respectively urged by different urging springs 366 (see FIG. 15). Variations occur in the magnitude of the urging force applied to each second rack 364 due to individual differences (variation in characteristics due to dimensions, materials, etc.) of the urging springs 366 of the book. This causes variation in the posture of each second rack 364 and affects the transmission of driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism, so that the one-side member 320L guides and drives the displacement member 310, This may cause a difference (shift) between the guide and drive of the displacement member 310 by the other-side member 320R. Such a shift makes it difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310 as described above, and not only increases the load on each drive motor 341 but also causes the displacement member 310 to stop.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 11366 is locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L, and the other end is locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. That is, since the urging is performed by the single urging spring 11366, the urging force applied to the second rack 364 of the one-side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other-side member 11320R can be made uniform. . Thereby, the variation in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed, and the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform, so that the one-side member 11320L guides and drives the displacement member 310. In addition, the guide and drive of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 11320R can be made uniform, and the displacement member 310 can be displaced stably.

  In addition, as in the case of the first embodiment, the assembling of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 in the eleventh embodiment is performed by connecting one end and the other end of the biasing spring 11366 to the locking portion of the second rack 364. In a non-locked state, a transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 332 (see FIG. 28), the back base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332, and between the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R. The interposing member 11370 is interposed, and thereafter, one end and the other end of the biasing spring 11366 are respectively locked to the locking portions of the second racks 364 through the first openings 331c of the rear bases 331. , Can be implemented. That is, also in the present embodiment, the biasing spring 11366 can be easily arranged in a bent position while suppressing the biasing spring 366 from being flipped and the second rack 364 from falling off. Work efficiency can be improved.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are rear views of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 56 shows a state before the interposed member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R, and FIG. 57 shows an interposed member 12370 between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. , Respectively, are shown in the figure.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the interposed member 370 is fastened and fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R with the screw via the connection plate 371 has been described. It is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R by the urging force of the urging spring 12366. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the up-down slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment has an engaged portion 12331f that is recessed on the opposing surface of the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R, respectively. Engaging portions 12372 that can be engaged with the portions 12331f protrude from both ends of the interposition member 12370. The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed to be bent in a substantially L-shape in rear view.

  In addition, a locking portion 12373 for locking the other end of the biasing spring 366 is formed on the back surface of the interposition member 12370, and the protruding tips of the protruding portions of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are formed. The other end of the urging spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposition member 12370 through the recessed portion.

  It should be noted that the interposition member 12370 is formed as a flat surface in which the region from the locking portion 12373 to the side edge is recessed toward the front side (the rear side on the paper in FIG. 56), whereby the urging spring 366 is moved from one end thereof. In the whole up to the other end, it can be arranged in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the plane of FIG. 56).

  The assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment is performed as follows. First, the transmission mechanism is assembled to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, and the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are assembled. In this case, contrary to the case of the first embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, while the other end is not locked, and the transmission mechanism is mounted. The rear base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332 in the folded state (see FIG. 28).

  As a result, the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R are formed in the state shown in FIG. 56, and then the engaging portion 12372 of the interposition member 12370 is engaged with the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R. The interposition member 12370 is interposed between the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R while being engaged with the portion 12331f. Finally, each of the urging springs 366 is inserted through the first opening 331c of each of the rear bases 331. Is locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposition member 12370, respectively. This completes the assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300, as shown in FIG.

  According to the present embodiment, a state in which the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed between the intermediate base 332 and the rear base 331 (that is, the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the rear base 331). In this state, the other end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposition member 12370, so that the biasing spring 366 is prevented from being repelled and the second rack 364 is prevented from falling off. In addition, the urging spring 366 can be disposed in a bent posture, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be increased.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, each of the biasing springs 366 is disposed in such a manner as to be inclined downward from the roller 367 (see FIG. 19) toward the locked portion 12373 of the interposition member 2370. Therefore, the force component in the direction of pulling the interposed member 12370 toward the left and right (the one side member 320L side and the other side member 320R side) and the force component in the direction of pushing the interposed member 12370 upward (to the displacement member 310 side). The force component can act on the interposition member 12370.

  Thereby, the engaging portion 12372 of the interposition member 12370 is pressed against the engaged portion 12331f of the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R by the urging force of the urging spring 366, so that the one-side member 320L and the other-side member The state in which the interposition member 12370 is interposed between 320R can be maintained. As a result, the interposed member 12370 is held by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (that is, at least until the interposed member 12370 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210). Fixed). Therefore, handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is mounted on the rear case 210 can be facilitated, and workability in the transporting process and the mounting process can be improved.

  Further, the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed in a substantially L shape in rear view, and the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R and the interposition member 12370 are connected to each other by the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion. Since the members 12320L and 12320R are joined by the engagement of the 12331f, it is possible to suppress the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R from being deformed into the “C” shape in the front view with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, also in this regard, handling before mounting the vertical slide unit 12300 to the rear case 210 can be facilitated, and workability in the transporting process and the mounting process can be improved.

  In addition, the urging force of the urging spring 363 is not only applied to the second rack 364 but also serves as a fixing force for fixing the interposed member 12370 between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. The members (for example, the connecting shaft 332m, the connecting plate 371, and the screws for fastening them) for fixing the interposed member 12370 to the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R can be unnecessary, and the number of parts and assembly can be reduced accordingly. Man-hours can be reduced.

  Note that the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are engaged in a state of having a predetermined play due to the dimensional tolerance. That is, since the relative displacement of the interposition member 12370 with respect to the one-side member 12320L and the other-side member 12320R can be allowed by the amount of the backlash, when the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the bottom plate portion 211 of the rear case 210, The attachment positions of the one-side member 12320L, the other-side member 12320R, and the interposition member 12370 can be individually adjusted, and the workability during the attachment can be improved.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58A is a rear perspective view of the other-side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 58B and 58C schematically show how the posture of the biasing spring 366 changes. It is a rear surface schematic diagram of the other side member 13320R shown.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement position of the roller 367 for setting the urging spring 366 in the bent position is fixed to a predetermined position has been described. However, the roller 10367 in the thirteenth embodiment has the arrangement position. Is changed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The other configuration of the other member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as that of the other member 10320R in the tenth embodiment except that a telescopic actuator 13671 is added. Therefore, description of the same configuration will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, a telescopic actuator 13671 is provided on the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment. The telescopic actuator 13671 includes a main body 13671a, a rod 13671b held by the main body 13671a, and a driving mechanism (shown in the drawing) for moving the rod 13671b forward or backward (extended or shortened) with respect to the main body 13671a. The main body 13671a is fixed to the back surface of the back base 331, and the roller 10367 is rotatably connected to the tip of the rod portion 13671b.

  In this case, the telescopic actuator 13671 is arranged in such a posture that its telescopic direction (the axial direction of the rod part 13671b) is along the linear part from the folded part to the end of the slit part 10331e. Therefore, by driving the expansion / contraction actuator 13671 to expand and contract the rod portion 13671b, the roller 10367 is moved to the end of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. 58 (b) and the folded portion of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. 58 (c). Can be displaced between

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the disposition position of the roller 10367 for abutting on the urging spring 366 to form the bent posture of the urging spring 366 is adjusted by the expansion and contraction of the rod portion 13671b by the expansion and contraction actuator 13671. It can be changed by operation. Thereby, the bending state of the urging spring 366 can be adjusted, and the state of the urging force (for example, the magnitude and the urging direction of the urging) applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 can be adjusted, for example. It can be adjusted according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position).

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 58C, the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened to preload the urging spring 366 (the preload of the urging spring 366 in the assembled state). By increasing the load, the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 can be increased. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58B, by extending the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the preload of the biasing spring 366 can be increased. And the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 can be reduced.

  Therefore, for example, when stopping the displacement member 310 at the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased, and the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 at the raised position is increased by the force of the biasing spring 366. While assisting by the urging force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (elevated or lowered) (that is, when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the urging spring 366 is reduced, and It is possible to suppress that the urging force becomes a resistance when the displacement member 310 (the second rack 364) is displaced.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 58C, by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 and the direction of the second rack 364 The angle (inclination angle) between the direction of the linear motion and the direction of the linear motion can be reduced (closed to be parallel), while, as shown in FIG. Thus, the angle (inclination angle) between the direction of the urging force applied to the second rack and the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, in an initial stage in a transition state in which the displacement of the second rack 364 is started, the behavior of the second rack 364 becomes unstable, so that the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced. A steady state in which the inclination angle is increased (that is, approaching the state of FIG. 58B) to prevent the attitude of the second rack 364 from being out of order, while the displacement speed of the second rack 364 reaches a constant. Since the behavior of the second rack 364 is stabilized at the stage of the above, the inclination angle of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made small (closer to the parallel) to reduce the resistance. Thus, the energy required for driving the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59A is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 59B is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300. 59A shows a state in which the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, and FIG. 59B shows a state in which the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is expanded.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the posture of the urging spring 11366 is maintained constant has been described. However, the posture of the urging spring 11366 in the thirteenth embodiment is changed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment differs from the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment in that a telescopic actuator 13671 and left and right rollers 14662 are added, and that the roller 11661 is a rod part 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671. The other configuration is the same except that it is disposed at the tip of the. Therefore, description of the same configuration will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), a telescopic actuator 13671 and left and right rollers 14662 are provided in the vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment.

  The telescopic actuator 13671 is disposed at the center in the width direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 59A) of the biasing spring 11366 in the rear view shown in FIG. 59 (a), and extends and contracts (in the axial direction of the rod portion 13671b). ) In the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 59A) (that is, the posture along the symmetry line of the biasing spring 11366).

  In the present embodiment, the roller 11661 is rotatably disposed at the tip of the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671, while the left and right rollers 14662 are rotatably disposed on the back of the interposition member 11370.

  Therefore, by extending and contracting the rod portion 13671b by driving the expansion / contraction actuator 13671, the roller 11661 is positioned at a position aligned with the left and right roller 14662 in the left and right direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 59A) as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 59 (c), it can be displaced below the left and right rollers 14662 (the lower side in FIG. 59 (a)).

  In the state shown in FIG. 59A in which the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, the biasing spring 11366 moves from the left and right bent portion (the roller 367, see FIG. 19) to the contact portion with the roller 11661. Are formed linearly.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the disposition position of the roller 11661 abutting on the urging spring 11366 can be changed by the expansion / contraction operation of the rod portion 13671b by the expansion / contraction actuator 13671. The state of the urging force (for example, the magnitude of the urging) applied to the second rack 364 from, for example, according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position), Can be adjusted.

  Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B, by extending the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the preload of the biasing spring 11366 (the load applied to the biasing spring 11366 in the assembled state). Is increased, the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 11366 can be increased, while the preload of the biasing spring 11366 is reduced by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 as shown in FIG. Thus, the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 11366 can be reduced.

  Therefore, for example, when stopping the displacement member 310 at the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased, and the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 at the raised position is increased by the force of the biasing spring 366. While assisting by the urging force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (elevated or lowered) (that is, when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the urging spring 366 is reduced, and It is possible to suppress that the urging force becomes a resistance when the displacement member 310 (the second rack 364) is displaced.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the preload can be adjusted for one urging spring 11366, so that the change in the urging force due to the adjustment can be controlled by the second rack 364 of the one-side member 11320L and the other-side member 11320R. And the second rack 364. Thereby, the variation in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed, and the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform, so that the one-side member 11320L guides and drives the displacement member 310. In addition, the guide and drive of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 11320R can be made uniform, and the displacement member 310 can be displaced stably.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the angle (inclination angle) between the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 11366 to each second rack 364 and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 is not changed. Only the preload of the biasing spring 11366 can be adjusted (while maintaining a constant tilt angle). Accordingly, when the preload of the biasing spring 11366 is adjusted, the inclination angle (direction in which the biasing force is applied) is changed in accordance with the adjustment, and the change in the inclination angle causes the posture of the second rack 364 to change. Can be avoided.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 15331 in the fifteenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the gear shaft 331b disposed to face the second pinion 365a is inserted into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is provided on the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In the fifteenth embodiment, the first restricting portion 15331g disposed to face the second pinion 365a abuts on the side surface of the second rack 15364. Then, the second rack 15364 is set to be displaceable along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the second rack 15364 of the transmission mechanism in the fifteenth embodiment has a side surface on the side where the rack is formed (the side surface on the second pinion 365a side) and a side opposite to the side surface (the left side in FIG. 60). ) Are formed as flat surfaces parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack. In detail, the side surfaces on both sides of the second rack 15364 are formed as flat surfaces parallel to each other at least in a range where a first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of second restricting portions 15331h described below come into contact with each other.

  A first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of left and right second restricting portions 15331h project from the front surface of the rear base 15331. The first restricting portion 15331g is a portion for abutting on the side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 60) of the second rack 15364 to define its posture, and faces the axis of the second pinion 365a with the second rack 15364 interposed therebetween. (In the assembled state of the back base 15331 and the intermediate base 332, the position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332) and is formed as a columnar body having a circular cross section. Specifically, the disposition position of the first restricting portion 15331g is such that the direction connecting the axis of the first restricting portion 15331g and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is orthogonal to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 15364. Is set to

  The second restricting portion 15331h is a portion for restricting the displacement of the second rack 15364 in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 60). A pair of the second restricting portions 15331h are formed at predetermined intervals, and each has a circular column shape. Formed as a body. The interval between the pair of second restricting portions 15331h (the interval in the left-right direction in FIG. 60) is larger than the width of the second rack 15364, and is formed so as to have a gap between the second rack 15364 and the side surface of the second rack 15364.

  In this case, the amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 60) permitted by the second restriction portion 15331h is permitted between the first restriction portion 15331g and the second pinion 365a. Of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction). The difference between the allowable displacement amounts is preferably set to 1.5 times or more. This is because the displacement (rotation) of the second rack 15364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a can be reliably formed.

  With the above configuration, according to the present embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the second rack 15364 is displaced (rotated) along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a while moving in the direction of linear motion. It can be displaced (see FIG. 26). Accordingly, even when the attitude of the second rack 15364 is unsteady, the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained at a constant level, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, it is not necessary to form the rack groove 364b (see FIG. 22) in the second rack 15364. The rigidity can be ensured, and the durability can be improved. Further, since the rack groove 364b can be omitted and the rigidity of the second rack 15364 is secured, the deformation of the second rack 15364 when driven by the rotation of the second pinion 365a can be suppressed. From this point of view, the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 61 and 62 are front views of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 15331 in the sixteenth embodiment, and correspond to FIGS. 22 and 24, respectively.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 is formed with a constant groove width along the longitudinal direction has been described, but the guide groove 634a of the second rack 16364 in the sixteenth embodiment is The concave width of the concave portion 16681 increases the groove width in a part of the longitudinal direction. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the second rack 16364 of the transmission mechanism in the sixteenth embodiment has a recess 16681 on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 365a side (the right side in FIGS. 61 and 62). It is recessed. The concave portion 16681 is a portion for restricting the linear movement of the second rack 16364, and is formed as an arc-shaped concave portion that can be engaged with the rack shaft 331b at two positions at the upper end and the lower end of the guide groove 364a. . The inner diameter of the recess 16681 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rack shaft 331b.

  The central angle of the arc of the concave portion 16681 is preferably set in a range of 30 ° or more and 120 ° or less, and more preferably in a range of 45 ° or more and 90 ° or less. This is to achieve a conflicting function between maintaining the engaged state between the concave portion 16681 and the rack shaft 331b and easily releasing the engagement.

  For example, in order to stop and hold the displacement member 310 at the raised position (see FIG. 21A), it is necessary to resist gravity acting on the displacement member 310. Power increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position, as shown in FIG. 61, the second rack 16364 is disposed at the lowest position in the movable range. The linear motion of the second rack 16364 can be restricted by engaging the rack shaft 331b with the concave portion 16681 at the lower end of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364. Thereby, the driving force required for the driving motor 341 can be reduced (or the driving thereof is stopped). As a result, energy consumption of the drive motor 341 when the displacement member 310 is held at the raised position can be suppressed.

  In a state where the displacement member 310 is located at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 62, the second rack 16364 is located at the uppermost position in the movable range, so that the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 is provided. The linear motion of the second rack 16364 can be regulated by engaging the rack shaft 331b with the concave portion 16681 at the upper end of the second rack 16364. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the displacement member 310 arranged at the lowered position from rattling due to the influence of disturbance.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the concave portion 16681 is recessed on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 365a side (the right side in FIGS. 61 and 62), and is provided to the second pinion 16364 from the biasing spring 366. When the direction of the biasing force is inclined (made non-parallel) with respect to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 16364, the direction of the inclination moves the second rack 16364 around the rack shaft 331b as a rotation center in FIG. 62 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 62 so that the rack shaft 331b is engaged with the concave portion 16681. Therefore, the engagement and disengagement of the concave portion 16681 and the rack shaft 331b are performed by the second rack 16364. It can be performed with linear motion.

  That is, when the second rack 16364 is displaced to the uppermost or lowermost position in the movable range, the concave portion 16681 faces the rack shaft 331b, and the second rack 16364 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring 366. The rack shaft 331b can be engaged (inserted) into the concave portion 16681, and the engagement between the concave portion 16681 and the rack shaft 331b can be maintained by the urging force of the urging spring 366. On the other hand, when the second pinion 365a is rotationally driven from that state, the second rack 16364 is rotated in a direction to pull out the rack shaft 331b from the concave portion 16681 while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 366, and The engagement with the rack shaft 331b is released. Thereby, the second rack 16364 can be linearly moved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mechanism (linear movement restricting means) for restricting the linear movement of the second rack 16364 is provided with a guide groove 364a formed in the second rack 16364 and a rack inserted into the guide groove 364a. Since the configuration is made using the shaft 331b, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the second rack 16364, and the space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the part for rotatably guiding the second pinion 365a, the rack shaft 331b also serves as a part (part engaging with the concave portion 16681) that constitutes the linear motion restricting means. The number of points can be reduced, and miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the ring segment 17440L1 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 63 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the ring segment 17440R1 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 63 (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring segment 17440L1 along the line LXIIIc-LXIIIc in FIG. 63 (a), and FIG. 63 (d) is a circle along the line LXIIId-LXIIId in FIG. 63 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the ring division body 17440R1. FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) correspond to FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b).

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described where a two-stage positioning mechanism is configured by providing the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a on the tip of the positioning convex portion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning concave portion 492. A ball plunger mechanism 17495 is provided at the tip of the positioning protrusion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning recess 492 in the seventeenth embodiment. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d), the positioning mechanism in the seventeenth embodiment protrudes from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440R1 similarly to the case of the first embodiment. And a positioning recess 492 recessed on the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440L1 as a recess capable of receiving the positioning projection 491. A recess 17493a is recessed in the installation bottom surface 17493, and the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 projects from the protruding tip surface of the positioning projection 491.

  The concave portion 17493a is formed as a spherical concave portion, and is formed so that the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be engaged. That is, the diameter of the spherical surface of the recess 17493a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495. In addition, the concave bottom surface 17493 of the positioning concave portion 492 is inclined downward toward the concave portion 17493a.

  The recess 17493a and the ball 17495a are engaged with each other at the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are brought into contact with each other (fitting and recessing), thereby performing final positioning. Part. The dimension of the ball 17495a protruding from the protruding distal end surface of the positioning projection 491 is set to a dimension smaller than the depth of the positioning recess 492.

  Thereby, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning with relatively coarse positioning accuracy (relatively wide allowable range of positional deviation) is performed by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, while allowing the protruding tip of the positioning projection 491 to be reliably received in the positioning recess 492 and enabling subsequent smooth guiding to an appropriate positioning position, the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. In the final stage, the ball 17495a is engaged with the recessed portion 17493a to improve the positioning accuracy, properly form the annular shape, and reliably suppress the rattling and wobble after the annular shape is formed. This makes it possible to perform two-stage positioning.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second stage of the positioning mechanism has a structure in which the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 is engaged with the concave portion 17493a formed in the concave bottom surface 17493. In the second stage of positioning when the bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the ring forming position, the ball 17495a can be rolled on the concave bottom surface 17493, and as a result, the positioning concave portion 492 is provided with the positioning convex portion 491. The movement between the time when the ball 17495a is received and the time when the ball 17495a engages with the concave portion 17493 can be smoothly performed. Performs smoothly with the operation when 17440R1 is displaced to the evacuation position Rukoto can.

  In this case, since the concave bottom surface 17493 of the positioning concave portion 492 is inclined downward toward the concave portion 17493a, the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be guided to the concave portion 1793a along the concave bottom surface 17493. Thus, these balls 17495a can be reliably engaged with the recessed portions 17493a.

  Further, when the annular divided bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the ring forming position, even if the protruding tip of the positioning projection 491 collides with the concave bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492, the ball plunger mechanism 17495 is not moved. The ball 17495a is brought into contact with the concave bottom surface 17493, and the spring can be elastically deformed as the ball 17495a retreats to absorb the impact.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400.

  64 and 65 correspond to the front view and the rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in a state where the unit is attached to the rear case 210 (that is, the assembled state of the operation unit 200). FIG. 64 shows the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 each partially cut by a virtual plane passing through the center of the posture defining member 18450 of the ring forming unit 18400 in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 65). It corresponds to a sectional view.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are not in contact with each other except for a portion attached to the rear case 210 has been described. However, in the eighteenth embodiment, the vertical slide unit 18300 The ring forming unit 18400 can be partially contacted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the vertical slide unit 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has the same configuration as the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment except that the diameter of the rotating base 18312 is increased. On the other hand, the ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment differs from the ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment in the shape of the side edge of the posture defining member 18450 on the side facing the rotation base 18312 (the rotation base). The other configuration is the same except that the holding portion 18453 is formed to be able to abut on the outer periphery of the 18312). In the following, description of these same configurations will be omitted. Note that the holding portion 18453 is curved in an arc shape concentric with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 in a rear view.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), after the vertical slide unit 18300 arranges the displacement member 310 at an intermediate position between the ascending position and the descending position, the ring forming unit 18400 moves to the ring segment 440L1. When 440R2 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming position, a ring shape is formed by the ring division bodies 440L1 to 440R2, and a rotating body 313 having a circular shape in a front view is provided at a predetermined interval on the inner peripheral side of the ring shape. Concentrically arranged. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the rotating body 313 whose periphery is surrounded by the annular shape.

  In this case, since a movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 311) is interposed in the displacement member 310, both ends of the main body portion 311 are connected to the end side portion 314. It is supported in a freely movable state. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, the rotation causes rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body 311, so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (an annular divided body). 440L1 to 440R2), which causes damage. When the position G of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric from the center of rotation as in the case of the above-described sixth embodiment, the problem of damage due to collision is particularly significant.

  On the other hand, if a gap is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 to such an extent that collision does not occur, the effect of the effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by the annular shape can be obtained. I can't show it enough. Further, even when the rotating body 313 does not collide with the annular shape (the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2), rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 is caused by the rotation of the rotating body 313. If continued, the movable parts (for example, the protruding pins 311a and the elongated holes 314a) are worn.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 of the vertical slide unit 18300 is disposed between the ascending position and the descending position, and the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 of the ring forming unit 18400 are moved to the ring forming position. When the state where the rotating body 313 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape is formed, a pair of the annular forming units 18400 slidably displaced in the left-right direction (directions approaching each other) by the suspending mechanism 450. The holding member 18453 makes the holding portion 18453 contact the outer peripheral surface of the rotating base 18312 of the vertical sliding unit 18300, and sandwiches the rotating base 18312 from left and right as shown in FIG.

  Accordingly, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 can be held by the ring forming unit 18400, so that the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end side portion 314 can be regulated (the movable mechanism is fixed). . As a result, even when the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the main body 311 from rattling or shaking with respect to the end side part 314, whereby the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (circular shape). It is possible to suppress the collision with the inner peripheral surface of the ring segmented bodies 440L1 to 440R2) and the wear and damage of the movable part (for example, the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a).

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end portion 314 in the displacement member 310 protrudes along the long diameter direction of the elongated hole 314a in the end portion 314 (the left-right direction in FIG. 65). When the setting pin 311a is formed by sliding, as described above, the pair of posture defining members 18450 are slid and displaced in the left-right direction, and the holding portions 18453 of the pair of posture defining members 18450 are moved by the vertical sliding unit 18300. As shown in FIG. 65, the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 is sandwiched from the left and right directions, thereby holding the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 (regulating relative displacement with the end side portion 314).

  Therefore, displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the elongated hole 314a, that is, a factor of rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body 311 can be efficiently regulated. As a result, the force required for holding the main body 311 (regulating the relative displacement with respect to the end side portion 314) can be further reduced, and the rattling and wobbling can be reliably suppressed.

  In this case, the posture defining member 18450 sandwiching the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the left and right directions is supported by the upper and lower arms 435 and 436 extending along the left and right directions as shown in FIG. The holding force in the direction (left-right direction) in which the 311 is relatively displaced with respect to the end side portion 314 can be increased, and from this point, it is possible to reliably suppress rattling and wobbling of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ring forming unit 18400 is provided, which arranges the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position to the ring forming position to form a ring shape and performs an effect. The relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is regulated by using the operation performed by the 18400 to form an annular shape (the movable mechanism is fixed). That is, it is possible to regulate the relative displacement in addition to the operation for the effect, and it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism or a driving means for regulating the relative displacement. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 66 corresponds to a front view and a rear view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in a state where the unit is attached to the rear case 210 (that is, the assembled state of the operation unit 200). FIG. 66 is a partial view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 each formed by a virtual plane passing through the center of the ring division bodies 440L1 to 440R2 of the ring forming unit 19400 in the thickness direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 66). FIG.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case has been described where the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 324 is regulated by directly contacting the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400. Thus, the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 324 is regulated while the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 are not in contact with each other. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the vertical slide unit 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment differs from the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment in that a plurality of magnets 1991 are provided (added) on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313. , Other configurations are the same. On the other hand, the ring forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment is different from the ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment in the inner peripheral side of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313). Other configurations are the same except that a plurality of metal plates 1992 are provided (added). In the following, description of these same configurations will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the nineteenth embodiment, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) magnets 1991 disposed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 313 are positioned at the same distance from the rotation center of the rotating body 313. , Are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  On the other hand, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) metal plates 1992 disposed on the inner peripheral side (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313) of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are made of a metal material. It is formed as a plate-like body curved in an arc shape along an inner peripheral surface of an annular shape formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. That is, each metal plate 1992 forms an annular shape in a front view that is concentric with the rotating body 313.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 313 is generated by the magnetic force acting between the magnet 1991 provided on the rotating body 313 and the metal plate 1992 provided on the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. Can be restricted in any direction. That is, the rotating body 313 can be held at a position (center on the inner circumferential side) concentric with the annular shape formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape (the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2). In addition, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, the main body 311 can be prevented from rattling or shaking with respect to the end side portion 314, whereby the movable portion (for example, the protruding pin 311a or the elongated hole 314a) can be formed. Wear and damage can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the metal plate 1992 is continuous over substantially the entire circumference and the magnets 1991 are disposed at intervals of 90 ° in the circumferential direction, the positions where the magnetic force acts are opposed to each other (by changing the phase by 180 °). Arrangement), whereby the rotating body 313 can be restrained from all sides. Therefore, not only the displacement (rattle or wobble) can be suppressed in any direction, but also the rotating body 313 with respect to the annular shape (inner peripheral surface) formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. When the relative positions of are shifted, the centering of the rotating body 313 concentrically with respect to the annular shape can be performed.

  Further, as in the case of the eighteenth embodiment, the rotating body 313 is held on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape by utilizing the operation performed for the effect that the annular forming unit 19400 forms the annular shape. (Regulation of the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end portion 314), and there is no need to separately provide a mechanism or driving means for holding the rotator 313 (regulation of the relative displacement). Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  For example, assuming that the configuration is such that the engaging structure by the engaged portion 12331f of the one-side members 12320R and 12320L and the engaging portion 12372 of the interposition member 12370 in the twelfth embodiment and the urging spring 11366 in the eleventh embodiment are one. A gaming machine may be configured by combining the above-described configurations.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the biasing spring 366 has a substantially “C” -shaped posture when viewed from the front is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The posture may be a substantially “S” shape when viewed from the front, a “J” shape when viewed from the front, or a combination of these shapes. That is, the bent posture of the biasing spring 366 may be any shape as long as the coil spring is formed by bending or bending at one or a plurality of locations.

  In each of the above embodiments, the elongated hole 314a formed in the end side portion 314 is formed in a front view elliptical shape in which the semicircles on both sides are connected by a straight line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Shape may be used. That is, as long as the protruding pin 311a is formed so as to be displaceable, for example, the protruding pin 311a may be formed to be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front, or may be bent in a く shape when viewed from the front, These may be formed in combination.

  In each of the above embodiments, the vertical slide unit 300 is disposed in a posture in which the displacement member 310 is displaced along the direction of gravity (vertical direction). However, the present invention is not limited to this. (The direction orthogonal to the direction of gravity) may be disposed in a posture displaced along the direction of gravity, and the displacement member 310 is disposed in a position displaced along a direction inclined with respect to the direction of gravity (vertical direction). May be. Even in these postures, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  In each of the above embodiments, the respective contact surfaces of the ring-shaped divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 and 17440L1 to 17440R2 are in contact with each other in a locus of circular motion while maintaining a posture parallel to the contact surface of the other party. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be close to each other while changing the degree of parallelism with respect to the contact surface of the opponent, and finally contact in a parallel posture, or While maintaining postures parallel to each other with respect to the contact surface of the opponent, they come close to each other by linear motion in a direction non-perpendicular to the contact surface, and finally contact in a parallel posture. Is also good.

  In the first embodiment, the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted to a predetermined range by the contact of the stopper surfaces 311a and 314a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, or additionally, the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end side portion 314 may be restricted to a predetermined range by the protruding pin 311a abutting on the end of the elongated hole 314a. .

  In the first embodiment, in assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c. The invention is not limited thereto, and the other end of the biasing spring 366 may be locked to the intermediate base 332 via the second opening 331d.

  In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the displacement members 4310 and 5310 are driven by the drive motor 341 of the one-side member 320L. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The displacement member 4310 is driven by the drive motor 341 of the other-side member 320R. , 5310 may be driven. That is, the movable mechanism side where the slide displacement is allowed or the rubber hardness is low (soft) is set as the drive side, but the movable mechanism side where only rotation is allowed or the rubber hardness is high (hard) is set as the drive side. It is good.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the direction of the inclination between the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack and the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364 by the expansion and contraction operation of the expansion and contraction actuator 13671 is the same. While the angle between these two directions (inclined angle) is increased or decreased, the inclined direction may be reversed. For example, in a state where the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to a predetermined position, the direction of the inclination is rightward (for example, a state shown in FIG. 58 (b)). A state in which the inclination is eliminated (that is, a state in which the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack coincides with the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (c)) After the (state), a form in which the direction of the inclination is leftward is exemplified. Accordingly, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is changed (reversed) according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). Adjustments can be made.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the side surface (the left surface in FIG. 60) of the second rack 15364 is formed as a flat surface, and the engagement between the side surface of the second rack 15364 and the first restricting portion 15331g is not formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a concave portion (for example, corresponding to the concave portion 16681 in the sixteenth embodiment) that can be engaged with the first restricting portion 15331g may be formed on the side surface of the second rack 15364. good. Thereby, similarly to the case of the sixteenth embodiment, the linear movement of the second rack 15364 can be restricted, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention in which the protruding pins 311a and the elongated holes 314a are examples>
One side member and the other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other end side are respectively bridged between the one side member and the other side member and are guided by the one side member and the other side member. In a gaming machine having a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, a movable mechanism is formed so as to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is connected to one end of the displacement member and the other. A gaming machine A1 which is interposed at least at one position between the end and the end.

  Here, one side member and the other side member which are disposed opposite each other at a predetermined interval, a long displacement member which is bridged between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving force is applied to the displacement member. A game machine provided with a driving unit for applying the information is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-14602). According to this gaming machine, the one side member is formed so as to be able to guide one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the other side member is formed so as to be able to guide the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. Thus, the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

  However, in a structure in which one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member is guided separately to one side member and the other side in the longitudinal direction to the other side member as in the gaming machine described above, the guide by one side member and the other side member There is a problem in that a gap easily occurs between the displacement member and the guide, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, not only does the load on the driving means become excessive, but also the stop of the displacement member may be caused.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is provided so as to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is provided at at least one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism, and the displacement member can be displaced stably. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving unit and stop the displacement member from stopping.

  The direction of displacement of the displacement member is not limited, and the displacement member may be displaced along a vertical direction (direction in which gravity acts), or may be displaced along a horizontal direction orthogonal to the vertical direction. Alternatively, it may be displaced along an inclined direction between the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The difference between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member includes, for example, a case where a difference occurs in the guide speed of the displacement member between the one-side member side and the other-side member side, and a case where the displacement member , A difference occurs in the guiding directions (phases), or a difference occurs in both. Since the same applies to the following, description thereof is omitted.

  In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the movable mechanism includes a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed with the guide groove and the guided portion guided along the guide groove, so that the structure of the movable mechanism is simplified. Can be In addition, since the movable amount and the movable direction of the movable mechanism can be arbitrarily set according to the shape (contour) of the guide groove, it is suitable for a mode of a shift generated between the guide by one side member and the guide by the other side member. It is easy to configure a movable mechanism.

  The guide groove may be a through hole or a concave groove as long as the guided portion can be guided by the inner wall surface. The guided portion may have any shape that can be displaced and / or rotated in the guide groove, and is, for example, a rod having a circular cross section, a polygonal cross section, or an elliptical cross section. The guide groove may allow only the rotation of the guided portion. That is, the guide groove is not limited to a linear shape, a curved shape, or a shape extending from a combination thereof, and may be a circular or polygonal shape that allows only rotation of the guided portion. good.

  The gaming machine A3, wherein the guide groove of the movable mechanism is formed in a long hole shape extending in a direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the guide groove of the movable mechanism has a long hole extending in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member (that is, the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member). Since it is formed in a shape, the guided portion can be easily displaced (guided easily) along the guide groove, and the displacement generated between the guide by one side member and the guide by the other side member can be effectively reduced by the movable mechanism. Can be absorbed.

  It is preferable that the width of the guide groove (the width in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole shape) is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guided portion. The direction in which the guided portion is displaced (guided) along the guide groove can be restricted to the direction connecting the one-side member and the other-side member. This is because the absorption by the movable mechanism can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine A3, in the gaming machine A4, the movable mechanism includes a plurality of the guide grooves.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A3, the movable mechanism has a plurality of long slot-shaped guide grooves formed in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, so that the rigidity of the movable mechanism is improved. And wobble and wobble when the displacement member is displaced can be suppressed.

  In addition, if the plurality of guide grooves have a long hole shape extending in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, the starting end and the end position of each guide groove are along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. Each may be different. That is, as long as the respective guide grooves are formed parallel to each other, the arrangement positions thereof may be different along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

  The gaming machine A5, wherein the movable mechanism is provided with a ball joint including a spherical ball portion and a socket portion in spherical contact with the ball portion.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed with the ball joint including the spherical ball portion and the socket portion that comes into spherical contact with the ball portion. It can be deformed, and the deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be stably absorbed. In addition, since the movable mechanism can be deformed in all directions, it can be absorbed regardless of the direction of the displacement that occurs between the guide by one side member and the guide by the other side member.

  The gaming machine A6 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, wherein the movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body. The movable mechanism can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the elastic body, in addition to absorbing the displacement generated between the movable mechanism and the guide. Further, when the elastic body is made of an elastomer, the vibration of the movable mechanism (displacement member) can be converged at an early stage by using its viscosity characteristic (damping effect), so that the occurrence of the above-described displacement can be suppressed. .

  Note that examples of the elastic body include an elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, or the like) and an elastic spring (coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, or the like). Further, a movable mechanism having a guide groove and a guided portion or a movable mechanism having a ball joint may be formed further including an elastic body. Thereby, a function of returning to the initial position and a function of facilitating convergence of vibration can be further added to the movable mechanism.

  The gaming machine A7, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the movable mechanism includes a regulating means for regulating a deformation exceeding a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, since there is provided a restricting means for restricting deformation exceeding a predetermined amount, between the guidance by one member and the guidance by the other member. It is possible to prevent the movable mechanism from being excessively deformed at the time of absorbing the generated displacement and from being damaged.

  When the movable mechanism has a guide groove and a guided portion, the guided portion is restricted by the inner wall surface (for example, the end) of the guide groove, thereby restricting deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more. And one in which one of the deformable members divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism is brought into contact with the other to restrict the deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more.

  The gaming machine A8, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is interposed at two places between one end and the other end of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is provided at two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. In the case where a deviation occurs between the guidance by the first member and the guidance by the other member, one of the movable mechanisms provided at two places is deformed according to the state of guidance by the one member and the other is the other member. Can be deformed according to the guiding state of the moving mechanism, and the displacement can be reliably absorbed by the interlocking of the two movable mechanisms. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced stably, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving unit and stop the displacement member from stopping.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is a modification in which the one end side is driven by the driving means and the other end side is driven, and the movable mechanisms provided at the two places are different from each other. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A8, one end of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end of the displacement member is driven by the driving (one-side drive). The number of means can be set to one, and the cost of product is lower than the structure (two-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is two for driving one end and the other end of the displacement member. Can be reduced.

  In this case, in the one-sided drive structure, the state of one end (drive side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where the deviation between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other member is likely to occur, according to the gaming machine A8, each of the two movable mechanisms has a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. Embodiments can be carried out. This makes it possible to effectively absorb the deviation generated between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, even with one-sided driving, the displacement member can be displaced stably, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving means and stop the displacement member from stopping.

  In the gaming machine A10, the movable mechanism interposed in the two places has at least one of an allowable deformation amount and a deformation direction different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms provided at the two locations are different from each other in at least one of the allowable deformation amount and the deformation direction. Can have a modification suitable for the driving side and a modification suitable for the driven side. For example, the amount of deformation allowed by the movable mechanism on the driving side is made larger (or smaller) than the amount of deformation allowed by the movable mechanism on the driven side, or the direction of deformation allowed by the movable function on the driven side is changed to the driven side. The direction can be different from the deformation direction allowed by the movable mechanism. This makes it possible to effectively absorb the deviation generated between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, even with one-sided driving, the displacement member can be displaced stably, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving means and stop the displacement member from stopping.

  In addition, as an aspect of the gaming machine A10, for example, in one movable mechanism, a shaft-shaped guided portion is supported by a circular guide groove to allow only rotation, and in the other movable mechanism, an elongated hole-shaped A form in which a shaft-shaped guided portion is slidably inserted into the guide groove and is allowed to be displaced along the direction in which the guide groove extends, or the guide grooves of both movable mechanisms are formed in an elongated hole shape. However, since the extending directions are different from each other, a form in which the sliding direction of the guided portion in the one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism is different from each other is exemplified.

  The gaming machine A11 according to the gaming machine A9, wherein the movable mechanisms provided at the two locations have different forces required to deform by a unit amount.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms provided at the two locations have different forces required to deform by a unit amount, so that the two movable mechanisms are provided. Each of the mechanisms can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the movable mechanism on the driving side can be more easily deformed (or hardly deformed) than the movable mechanism on the driven side. This makes it possible to effectively absorb the deviation generated between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, even with one-sided driving, the displacement member can be displaced stably, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving means and stop the displacement member from stopping.

  As an aspect of the gaming machine A11, for example, when both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type or different types of elastic bodies, the elastic body is deformed by one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism. Although the ease (hardness when the elastic body is an elastomer, and the spring constant when the elastic body is an elastic spring) is different from each other, and both movable mechanisms are formed with the same kind of elastic body, An example is given in which the size of the body (dimensions such as cross-sectional area) differs between the one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism.

  The gaming machine A12, wherein the one end side and the other end side of the gaming machine A8 are driven by different driving means.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the structure in which one end and the other end are driven by different driving means (double-sided driving), so that the structure is driven by one driving means (one-sided driving). Since the shared load of the driving means can be reduced as compared with the case of (1), the displacement member can be increased in size or the displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased.

  With such a double-sided drive structure, it is difficult to completely synchronize the drive on one end side and the drive on the other end side of the displacement member, and there is a gap between the guide by one side member and the guide by the other side member. And the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable. On the other hand, by disposing the movable mechanism at two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member as in the present invention, a double-sided drive structure can be adopted for the first time. It has become possible to increase the size of the displacement member or increase the displacement speed of the displacement member while ensuring the stability of the displacement of the member.

  In the gaming machine A12, "different driving means" means "two driving means". Therefore, the configuration (type (eg, brush motor, brushless motor, stepping motor, etc.), characteristics (eg, torque-current characteristics, torque-speed characteristics, etc.), capacity (eg, rated output, etc.) of the driving means itself, etc. ) May have the same configuration or different configurations. The same applies to the following.

  The displacement member is configured such that the one end side is driven by the driving unit and the other end side is driven, and the movable mechanism is located at one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, A gaming machine A13 characterized in that it is disposed so as to be biased toward one of the one end side and the other end side of the center of the displacement member in the longitudinal direction.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, one end of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end of the displacement member is driven by the driving means (one side). Drive), the number of drive means can be set to one, and compared to a structure (two-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is set to two to drive one end and the other end of the displacement member, respectively. As a result, the product cost can be reduced. Similarly, since the movable mechanism is provided only at one location, product cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the movable mechanism is provided at two locations.

  In this case, in the one-sided drive structure, the state of one end (drive side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where the deviation between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other member is likely to occur, according to the gaming machine A13, the movable mechanism is biased to one of the one end side and the other end side (that is, the drive side or the driven side). Therefore, the displacement generated between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even with one-sided driving and one movable mechanism, the displacement member can be displaced stably, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving means and stop the displacement member from stopping.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the game machine further includes a second displacement member disposed on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member. And the second displacement member is displaced, so that the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is biased toward one end or the other end from the longitudinal center of the displacement member. Gaming machine A14 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, one end of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end of the displacement member is driven by the driving means (one side). Drive), the number of drive means can be set to one, and compared to a structure (two-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is set to two to drive one end and the other end of the displacement member, respectively. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, in the one-sided drive structure, the state of one end (drive side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where the deviation between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other member is likely to occur, according to the gaming machine A14, by displacing the second displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is made larger than the center of the displacement member in the longitudinal direction. Since it can be deviated to one end side or the other end side (that is, the drive side or the driven side), the displacement generated between the guide by one side member and the guide by the other side member due to the movement of the center of gravity is caused by the movable mechanism. A state in which absorption is easy can be formed. Thus, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with one-side drive, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving unit and stop the displacement member from stopping.

  In addition, as a mode of changing the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member by the displacement of the second displacement member, for example, when the driving of the displacement member by the driving unit is started and during a predetermined period from the start, the center of gravity of the displacement member is The position is moved closer to (or away from) the drive side (one end), and after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of driving of the displacement member by the drive means, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is moved closer to the driven side (the other end). While the displacement member is displaced on the outward path, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is moved closer (or away) to the drive side (one end side) while the displacement member is displaced on the outward path, while the displacement member is displaced on the return path. Is an example in which the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is moved closer (or farther) to the driven side (the other end). When the displacement member is reciprocated (elevated and lowered) in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the latter configuration is particularly effective. That is, for example, when focusing on one end side, the state in which one end side is guided by one side member is changed between a rising time displaced against gravity and a falling time assisted by the displacement due to gravity, Being able to change the position of the center of gravity in accordance with the state is effective in making the movable mechanism function properly. The same applies to the other end.

  Examples of the form of the second displacement member include a form in which the displacement member is slid and displaced along the longitudinal direction thereof, and a form in which the displacement member is rotatably formed and the center of gravity is decentered from the center of rotation. And the like. The trajectory of the slide displacement is exemplified by a straight line, a curve, a combination thereof, and the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, a second displacement member provided on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member, and a regulating means for regulating deformation of the movable mechanism. A gaming machine A15 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, since the gaming machine A15 includes the second displacement member disposed on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member, An effect can be performed by displacing the second displacement member. In this case, since the movable member is interposed in the displacement member, when the second displacement member is displaced, the movable member is deformed, so that the displacement member rattles and the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced. It may be hindered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A15, since the regulating mechanism for regulating the deformation of the movable mechanism is provided, the displacement of the movable mechanism is regulated, and the second displacement member is moved in a state where the play of the displacement member is suppressed. It can be displaced in a stable state.

  In addition, as the second displacement member, for example, a rotating body rotatably disposed on the displacement member, a slide body disposed slidably with respect to the displacement member, or a rotatably pivoted support on the displacement member An oscillating body that oscillates the other end side around the one end side is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A15, when the displacement member is displaced to its displacement end, the restricting means acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to change a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. A gaming machine A16 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A15, when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, the restricting means acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism, whereby the movable mechanism Since the state in which the deformation is restricted is formed, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be restricted by using the displacement of the displacement member. That is, there is no need to separately provide a driving unit for restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving unit for displacing the displacement member can also be used as a driving unit for causing the regulating unit to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, as a form of the restricting means that acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, first, one side member, the other side member, or one of them may be used. A first engagement member is formed on the base member to which the side member and the other side member are attached, and a second engagement member engageable with the first engagement portion is formed on the displacement member. When displaced to the displacement end, the first engagement member and the second engagement member are engaged and the displacement of the displacement member is regulated, whereby the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated. Secondly, an insertion member is formed on one side member, another side member or a base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached, and when the displacement member is displaced to its displacement end, the movable mechanism An insertion member is inserted into a gap between one and the other of the deformed members divided by the interposition. Third, the form in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by being inserted is a method in which the first magnet is attached to one side member, the other side member, or a base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached. In addition to disposing the second magnet on the displacement member, when the displacement member is displaced to its displacement end, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, thereby displacing the displacement member. Fourth, the mode in which the displacement of the member is regulated and the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated is, fourthly, when the movable mechanism is formed from the guide groove and the guided portion, a recess is formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove, When the displacement member is displaced to the displacement end, the guided portion is fitted into the concave portion of the guide groove, thereby limiting the deformation of the movable mechanism. In the third embodiment, one of the first magnet and the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material).

  In the gaming machine A15, the game machine A15 includes a third displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between a retreat position and a predetermined position, and the restricting means is configured such that the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acts on the displacement member. A gaming machine A17, wherein the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A15, since the game machine A17 includes the third displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the retreat position and the predetermined position, the effect is produced by displacing the third displacement member. It can be carried out. In this case, the restricting means forms a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acting on the displacement member. In addition, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be restricted. That is, there is no need to separately provide a driving unit for restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving unit for displacing the third displacement member can also be used as a driving unit for causing the restricting unit to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, as a form of the regulating means which acts on the displacement member to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated, for example, first, a third displacement member displaced to a predetermined position comes into contact with the displacement member. By doing so, the displacement of the displacement member is regulated and the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated. Second, a part of the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position is divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism. Third, the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by being inserted into the gap between one and the other of the deformed members. Third, the first magnet is provided on the third displacement member, The second magnet is disposed on the displacement member, and when the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, so that the displacement of the displacement member is reduced. The modes in which the deformation is restricted and the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted are exemplified. In the third embodiment, one of the first magnet and the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material).

  In particular, in the first and second embodiments, the third displacement member includes a plurality of annular forming members, and when displaced to a predetermined position, the plurality of annular forming members unite to form an annular body. It is preferable that the annular member surrounds the second displacement member (that is, the annular member is disposed around the second displacement member). Thus, in the first embodiment, the outer peripheral side of the second displacement member is brought into contact with the inner peripheral side of the annular body formed by the annular forming member from all directions, thereby restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism. The positioning (centering) of the two displacement members can also be performed. The same applies to the third embodiment.

<About the concept of the invention in which the urging spring 366 that urges the second rack 364 non-parallel is used as an example>
In a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force, and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit, a rack and a pinion that transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the rack Wherein the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is non-parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack. B1.

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine that transmits a driving force of a driving unit by a rack and a pinion to displace a displacement member (see, for example, JP-A-2014-28226). In this case, for example, in a structure in which the displacement member is moved up and down, a larger driving force is required to raise the displacement member than to move it down due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member. Therefore, an urging means for applying an urging force along the direction of linear movement of the rack is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is assisted by the urging force of the urging means.

  However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and the pinion as in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, the rack is guided along the guide mechanism when performing a linear motion (linear motion), and a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. (I.e., the rack rattles in the direction in which the rack approaches and separates from the pinion), the meshing with the pinion becomes unstable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied along the direction in which the rack moves linearly, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force to promote that the attitude of the rack is violent.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the rack and the pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the urging unit for applying an urging force to the rack are provided, and the urging unit applies the urging force to the rack. Since the direction of the urging force is not parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack, the urging force of the urging means can be applied as a force in a direction for pressing the rack against a guide mechanism for guiding the rack. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack from rattling and to prevent the posture from being ramped up. Furthermore, since the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is not parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack, even if the attitude of the rack changes once, the attitude of the rack does not change. The urging force of the urging means can be applied as the force in the direction to converge. Therefore, the meshing of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted stably.

  In the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed of an elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed of an elastic body, so that the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is changed with respect to the linear movement direction of the rack. To make the structure non-parallel. In addition, since the elastic body can continuously apply the urging force according to the displacement of the rack, the rack can be urged stably.

  In addition, as an elastic body, an elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, etc.) and an elastic spring (a coil spring, a torsion spring, a leaf spring, etc.) are illustrated, for example. For example, an elastic body is formed from a band-like or string-like rubber-like elastic body (rubber band) or a metal coil spring, and its longitudinal direction (extending / contracting direction) is set to a direction that is non-parallel to the linear motion direction of the rack. In addition, by connecting one end to the rack and the other end to the base member, simplification of the structure and stable urging (continuous urging force application) can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer, and is disposed in a bent posture.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, since the elastic body is formed from a coil spring or a long elastomer and is arranged in a bent posture, it is necessary to arrange the elastic body. A sufficient space can be easily secured, and accordingly, the degree of freedom of design and the urging force can be secured. That is, in order to secure the urging force of the elastic body, it is necessary to increase the length of the elastic body. However, if the length of the elastic body is increased, the arrangement of the elastic body is caused by interference with other members. It is difficult to secure the installation space. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, since the elastic body is disposed in a bent posture, the length of the elastic body is lengthened to prevent the interference with other members while securing the urging force. Thus, a space for disposing the elastic body can be secured.

  In addition, the bent position of the elastic body is intended to include a part or all of the curvature, and therefore, the shape of the elastic body disposed in the bent position includes, for example, a linear portion and a linear shape. Examples include a shape in which a curved portion is connected to a portion (that is, a “C” -shaped shape in which a bent portion has a rounded shape) and a shape in which the entire portion is curved (ie, a “C” -shaped shape). Is done.

  In the gaming machine B1, the biasing means is formed of a magnet.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed of a magnet, so that a stable urging force can be applied to the rack for a long period of time. That is, in the elastic body, when the rack is repeatedly deteriorated (set) and the urging force is changed, the urging force is changed over a long period of time by using a magnet as in the gaming machine B4. It can be constant. As a result, the effect of making the direction of the urging force non-parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack can be stably exhibited over a long period of time.

  In the case where the urging means is formed from magnets, the first magnet is provided on the rack, and the second magnet is provided on the movement trajectory of the rack. A configuration in which a biasing force is applied to the rack when the two magnets attract or repel each other is exemplified. In this case, one of the first magnet and the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material). The number of the first magnets and the second magnets (including iron members) is arbitrary, and may be one or more.

  In the gaming machine B4, the urging means sets a range in which the urging force exceeding the reference value is applied to the rack and a range in which the urging force applied to the rack is equal to or less than the reference value in a range in which the rack moves directly. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B4, the urging means includes a range in which the urging force exceeding the reference value is applied to the rack and a range in which the urging force is applied to the rack. Since the range in which the force is equal to or less than the reference value is formed, the force applied to the rack can be set to a force suitable for the state of the rack.

  For example, in the first range, by applying an urging force exceeding the reference value to the rack, the rack is less likely to rattle, and the occurrence of the posture is prevented from being ramped up. By setting the urging force applied to the rack to be equal to or less than the reference value, it is possible to reduce the urging force (magnetic force) from becoming a resistance to driving the rack, thereby suppressing energy consumption of the driving unit.

  In this case, the configuration is such that a first magnet is provided on the rack, and a range in which the second magnet is provided (first range) and a second magnet are provided on the movement trajectory of the rack. Is formed, and when the rack (first magnet) passes through the first range, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other. When the rack (the first magnet) passes through the second range while the biasing force exceeding the reference value is applied to the rack, the magnet acting between the rack and the first magnet is A configuration in which no urging force is applied to the rack (or the applied urging force is equal to or less than the reference value) due to the absence (or small effect) is exemplified. As described above, in this case, either one of the first magnet and the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material). Further, as in the case described above, the number of the first magnets and the second magnets (including iron members) is arbitrary, and may be one or more.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is a direction that generates a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack close to the tooth surface of the pinion. Gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is a force component for bringing the tooth surface of the rack close to the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surface of the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion can be suppressed. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surfaces suppresses the occurrence of a time lag when the driving force is transmitted from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa), thereby improving the responsiveness, and the collision between the tooth surfaces at the initial stage of meshing. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the wear of the tooth surface from being promoted and the tooth surface from being damaged. Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is a direction that generates a force component for separating the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is a force component for separating the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Is generated, the gap between the tooth surface of the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion is excessively clogged, and it is possible to prevent the pressure from being excessively increased in meshing. As a result, the pinion moves to the rack (or vice versa). Resistance when transmitting the driving force to the motor.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a force component for causing the direction of the urging force applied to the rack by the urging means to bring the tooth surface of the rack close to the tooth surface of the pinion is set in a range in which the rack moves directly. A first range in which the force is generated, and a second range in which the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is a direction in which a force component for separating the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion is generated. Is formed.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack can be changed in a range where the rack moves linearly. The meshing state of the rack and the pinion can be changed to an optimum state according to the state of the displacement member, the rack, or the driving means.

  For example, by applying the first range to an initial stage in a transitional state when starting transmission of the driving force (that is, a stage of starting the displacement of the displacement member), the tooth surfaces are brought close to each other, and the driving force is transmitted. The second range is applied to a stage where the transmission of the driving force is stabilized and becomes a steady state (that is, a stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed) while improving the responsiveness in the transmission of the drive force. Thus, the tooth surfaces can be separated from each other, and the resistance can be suppressed.

  Alternatively, this may be reversed. That is, in the initial stage in the transition state when the transmission of the driving force is started (that is, the stage in which the displacement of the displacement member is started), the inertia force is large to start the displacement of the displacement member in the stopped state, and the driving force is increased. Where the load on the means is increased, by applying the second range to the initial stage, the tooth surfaces can be separated from each other and the resistance can be suppressed, so that the load on the driving means can be suppressed. On the other hand, at the stage where the transmission of the driving force becomes stable and in a steady state (that is, the stage where the displacement member is being displaced at a constant speed), the displacement speed of the displacement member becomes high. Where the influence of rattling is transmitted to the displacement member and stable displacement of the displacement member is hindered, by applying the first range to such a stage, the tooth surfaces can be brought close to each other and the rack can be made less likely to rattle. In addition, even when the displacement speed of the displacement member is high, the displacement can be stabilized. In particular, the latter configuration has a structure in which a long displacement member bridged between the one-side member and the other-side member is displaced by being guided by the one-side member and the other-side member at one end and the other end, respectively. Is effective in

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the game machine includes one side member and another side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and the displacement member is bridged between the one side member and the other side member. A gaming machine B9 wherein one end and the other end are guided and displaced by a member and another member, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machine B9 includes one side member and another side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and is provided between the one side member and the other side member. And the displacement member is displaced by one end and the other end being guided by one side member and the other side member, so that the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is determined by the linear motion direction of the rack. The effect of the non-parallelism can be effectively exhibited.

  Here, in such a structure, when a deviation occurs between the guide by one side member and the guide by the other side member, the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable, and not only the load on the driving means becomes excessive, but also the displacement member May be stopped. That is, in a conventional product in which the posture of the rack is easily deviated, a deviation occurs between the guide by one side member and the other side member due to the deviation of the rack, and the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is not parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack, the rack is less likely to rattle. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the posture rampage. In addition, even if the attitude of the rack is once violent, the urging force of the urging means can be applied as a force in the direction to converge the violence of the attitude. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift between the guide by the one-side member and the other-side member due to the ramp of the rack, and to stabilize the displacement of the displacement member.

  The gaming machine B9 includes a movable mechanism that is formed to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end and the other end of the displacement member. B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B9, the gaming machine B10 includes a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is provided at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be displaced stably.

  On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, if the movable mechanism functions when the displacement member is displaced, the deformation of the movable mechanism acts as an external force on the rack, causing the rack to rattle. . For this reason, the attitude of the rack is erratic, and the meshing of the rack and the pinion becomes unstable and the durability is reduced. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is not parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack, the external force acting upon the deformation of the movable mechanism. Can be opposed by the urging force applied from the urging means, so that the rack is less likely to rattle. As a result, it is possible to suppress the attitude of the rack from being violated, stabilize the engagement between the rack and the pinion, and improve the durability.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the urging spring 366 arranged in a bent posture is an example>
A base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, and one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member. And a biasing means, wherein the biasing means is disposed in a bent posture.

  Here, the base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, an urging means having one end connected to the target member and the other end connected to the base member, and an urging means. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including an opposing member disposed to oppose a base member with being sandwiched therebetween is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-28226). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the urging force of the urging unit.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure the urging force because the space in which the urging means can be arranged is limited. That is, in order to secure the urging force of the urging means, it is necessary to secure a sufficient length dimension, but it is necessary to arrange the urging means while avoiding interference with other members, It was difficult to make the length dimension long enough.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the urging means is disposed in a bent posture, so that the urging means can be easily disposed while avoiding interference of other members, so that a sufficient length dimension can be secured. It is possible to easily secure the urging force.

  In addition, the bent position of the elastic body is intended to include a part or all of the curvature, and therefore, the shape of the elastic body disposed in the bent position includes, for example, a linear portion and a linear shape. Examples include a shape in which a curved portion is connected to a portion (that is, a “C” -shaped shape in which a bent portion has a rounded shape) and a shape in which the entire portion is curved (ie, a “C” -shaped shape). Is done.

  The gaming machine C1 includes an opposing member disposed to oppose the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween, and the opposing member is formed to be open in a region including at least one of one end and the other end of the urging member. A gaming machine C2 having an opening.

  Here, when the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is easy to secure the arrangement space, but it is difficult to maintain the bent posture. There is a problem that it is spilled (jumps with its own elastic recovery force). Therefore, in the assembling process, while pressing the urging means with one hand so that the urging means maintains the bent position, the work of connecting the urging means to the target member or the base member with the other hand is performed. It had to be performed, and it was complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, an opposing member is provided to oppose the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween, and the opposing member includes one end of the urging member or Since an opening is formed in a region including at least one of the other ends, even after connecting one of the one end or the other end of the urging means and disposing the opposing member, the opening of the opposing member is formed. One end or the other of the other end of the urging means can be connected via the urging means. That is, since the opposing member is disposed to oppose the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween, it is possible to prevent the urging means from being repelled. As a result, the operation of connecting the other end of the urging means can be easily performed, and the assembling operation can be simplified.

  Further, even when the opposing member is disposed to oppose the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween, since the opening is formed in the opposing member, the distance between the opposing member and the urging means is correspondingly increased. Can be suppressed, and the occurrence of resistance can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the urging means from being hindered, and it is possible to stably apply the urging force to the target member. Further, for example, even when the biasing means is formed of a metal coil spring and the strength of one material is lower than that of the other, such as in a case where the facing member is formed of a resin material, these members may be used. It is possible to prevent one member from being worn due to the sliding, and to prevent dust generated due to the abrasion from entering a mechanically movable part or an electronic device such as a sensor and exerting an adverse effect.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the opposing member includes the opening in a region including one end of the urging member and a region including the other end.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C2, the opposing member is formed with an opening in each of a region including one end of the urging member and a region including the other end of the urging member. The opposing member can be left in the bent portion of. Therefore, it is possible to press a necessary part for maintaining the bent position of the urging means with the opposing member while securing the maximum formation area of the opening. As a result, simplification of the assembling work and suppression of sliding resistance and generation of dust can be effectively achieved.

  In the gaming machine C3, the facing member communicates with an opening formed in a region including one end of the biasing unit and an opening formed in a region including the other end of the biasing unit. The communication passage is formed as an opening having a size that allows the urging means to pass through, and is further outwardly bent than a bent portion of the urging means disposed in the bent posture. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being located.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the opening formed in the region including one end of the urging unit and the opening formed in the region including the other end of the urging unit are formed. A communication path is provided for communication, and the communication path is formed as an opening having a size that allows the urging means to pass therethrough, and is outwardly bent from a bent portion of the urging means arranged in a bent posture. Since it is located, first, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to each of the target member or the base member via each opening of the opposing member, and then, via each opening and the communication passage of the opposing member. The urging means can be arranged between the base member and the opposing member (ie, a bent posture can be formed after fixing both ends of the urging means), whereby the urging means is repelled. Figure that bent the urging means while suppressing Easily disposed.

  The gaming machine C5, further comprising a stop plate member disposed opposite to the base member with the bent portion of the urging means disposed in the bent position in the gaming machine C1.

  Here, when the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is easy to secure the arrangement space, but it is difficult to maintain the bent posture. There is a problem that it is spilled (jumps with its own elastic recovery force). Therefore, in the assembling process, while pressing the urging means with one hand so that the urging means maintains the bent position, the work of connecting the urging means to the target member or the base member with the other hand is performed. It had to be performed, and it was complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the game machine C5 includes a stop plate member that is arranged to face the base member with the bending portion of the urging means disposed in the bent posture interposed therebetween. Therefore, first, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to the target member or the base member, respectively, and then the intermediate portion of the urging means is locked to the stopper member (the opposition of the base member and the stopper member). (Ie, a bent position can be formed after fixing both ends of the biasing means), whereby the biasing means can be bent while suppressing the biasing means from being flipped. It can be easily arranged in a posture that has been set. Therefore, the assembly work can be simplified.

  Furthermore, the area where the stop plate member faces is only the bent portion of the urging means, and the area other than the bent part of the urging means is open, so that the sliding when the urging means is elastically deformed is suppressed. Thus, the occurrence of resistance can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the urging means from being hindered, and it is possible to stably apply the urging force to the target member. In addition, since the area other than the bent portion of the urging means is opened, the mating member is worn due to sliding, and dust generated due to the abrasion is used to remove mechanical moving parts and electronic devices such as sensors. Penetration and adverse effects can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C5, the gaming machine C5 is provided with a rotation contact member formed so as to be rotatable and capable of contacting the outer peripheral surface with the urging means, and the urging means is provided between the one end and the other end. A part is abutted on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating contact member, and is disposed in a bent posture, and the stop plate member is formed in a flange shape radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating contact member. A gaming machine C6, wherein a protruding flange portion is formed integrally with the rotary contact member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C5, the rotating contact member for abutting the outer peripheral surface against the urging means is formed rotatably so that the urging means has a bent posture. When the urging means is elastically deformed (e.g., expanded and contracted), the rotation contact member and the stop plate member (flange) can also be rotated with the elastic deformation, and the elastic deformation of the urging means is smoothly performed. Can be performed. That is, in order to make the urging means bend, a member that contacts the urging means (corresponding to a rotating contact member) or the urging member is prevented from being repelled (not jumping by its own elastic recovery force). As compared with the case where a member (corresponding to a stop plate member) is fixed, the sliding resistance generated between the member and the urging means can be suppressed. Further, since the sliding can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the abrasion caused by the sliding and the adverse effect of dust generated due to the abrasion.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game machine further includes a displacement contact member which is disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable and is formed so as to be able to contact the urging means. The gaming machine C7, wherein the urging means is disposed in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a part between the one end and the other end of the means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 includes a displacement abutting member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displacement abutting member is connected to one end of the urging means. By being displaced while being in contact with a part between the other end and the urging means, the urging means is disposed in a bent posture, so that the assembling work of the urging means can be facilitated. That is, first, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to the target member or the base member, and then the displacement abutting member is displaced, so that the urging means can be in a bent posture. Therefore, since a bent posture can be formed after fixing both ends of the urging means, it is possible to easily arrange the urging means in the bent posture while suppressing the urging means from being flipped. .

  In the gaming machine C7, the base member includes guide means for guiding the displacement contact member, the guide means extending in a direction in which the biasing means is bent, and a first guide part extending in a direction in which the biasing means is bent. A gaming machine C8 comprising: a second guide portion that is folded back from a terminal end side of the guide portion and extends in a direction to weaken a bent posture of the urging means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the guide means for guiding the displacement member includes a first guide portion extending in a direction in which the urging means is bent, and an end of the first guide portion. And a second guide portion that is folded back from the side and extends in a direction to weaken the bent position of the biasing unit. Therefore, by displacing the displacement contact member along the first guide unit of the guide unit, A bent posture can be formed, and the displacement contact member is disposed on the second guide portion of the guide means, so that the displacement contact member is pressed against the end of the second guide portion and held by the elastic recovery force of the urging means. be able to. That is, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only for urging the target member but also for holding (fixing) the displacement contact member, a member for fixing the displacement contact member (for example, It is not necessary to separately prepare a fastening screw) and to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and the number of assembling steps can be reduced accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a pair of the target members is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the biasing unit is configured such that one end is directly connected to one target member of the pair of target members. A game machine C9 connected directly or indirectly, and the other end of the pair of target members being directly or indirectly connected to the other target member.

  Here, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, and one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member. It is known that a pair of biasing means is provided, and a pair of target members are displaceably disposed on a base member, and the pair of target members are biased by different biasing means. According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the urging force of the urging unit.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, since each of the target members is urged by a separate urging means, the magnitude of the urging force applied to each of the target members due to the individual difference of the separate urging means. However, there is a problem that variation occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, when the pair of target members are displaceably disposed on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are attached to one and the other of the pair of target members. Since each is connected, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform. That is, when the two urging means are provided, the urging force applied to the pair of target members varies due to the variation in the characteristics (such as dimensional tolerance) of each urging means. By applying the biasing force to each of the pair of target members, it is possible to suppress the biasing force applied to each of the target members from varying. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the pair of target members from varying.

  In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a pair of target members are respectively disposed on one base member, or the base member is divided and the pair of target members are disposed on different base members. May be used.

  Further, the gaming machine C9 has one side member and another side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and is provided between the one side member and the other side member. It is particularly effective to apply the present invention to a game machine including a displacement member whose other end is guided and displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the gaming machine G1 to a configuration for guiding one end of the displacement member and a configuration for guiding the other end. In such a gaming machine, a gap easily occurs between the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side of the displacement member, and it has been difficult to stably displace the displacement member. Is applied, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and the variation in their displacement can be suppressed, so that the guide at one end of the displacement member and the guide at the other end can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement can be suppressed and the displacement member can be displaced stably.

  In the gaming machine C9, a connecting member connected to the base member is provided, and one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the urging means is provided. By being in contact with the connecting member, the urging force of the urging means is applied such that the connecting member is pressed against the base member and the connection between the base member and the connecting member is maintained. Gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C9, an intermediate portion of the urging means having one end and the other end connected to each of the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as a base. Since the urging force is applied so as to press the member and maintain the connection between the base member and the connecting member, at least the connecting member can be temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, by such temporary fixing, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when attaching the base member and the connecting member to the attachment target. Further, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging of the target member but also as the fixing force of the connecting member to the base member, a member for fixing the connecting member to the base member (for example, , Fastening screws) need not be separately prepared, and it is not necessary to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and the number of assembling steps can be reduced accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, a displacement contact member that is displaceably disposed on the base member and that is in contact with the urging means to form a bent posture of the urging means; Contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member, wherein the bending state of the urging means can be changed by displacing the displacement contact member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. A gaming machine C11.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the gaming machine C10 is displaceably disposed on the base member and abuts on the urging means to form a bent posture of the urging means. A displacement contact member, and contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement contact member, wherein the displacement contact member is displaced by the driving force of the contact member driving means, so that the urging means Since the bending state can be changed, the urging state of the urging means can be adjusted to a more appropriate state according to the state of the target member to which the urging force is applied.

  Note that, as the displacement direction of the displacement contact member, first, the direction connecting one end of the urging means (the position connected to the target member) and the displacement contact member is not changed, and the displacement direction of the displacement contact member is not changed. Second, the direction in which the distance between the displacement abutment member is changed does not change the distance between one end of the urging means and the displacement abutment member. Thirdly, a direction in which the direction connecting the first and second directions is changed is exemplified by a direction in which the first and second directions are combined.

  In the case of the first direction, the preload of the urging means (the load applied to the urging means in the assembled state) is changed without changing the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member. The size can be adjusted. That is, the apparent spring constant of the urging means can be adjusted (increased or decreased). Therefore, the magnitude of the urging force applied from the urging means in accordance with the displacement amount of the target member from the reference position is controlled in accordance with the state of the target member (for example, posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). be able to. For example, when the target member is at the upper end position, the preload of the urging means is increased, and the force required to maintain the target member at the upper end position is assisted by the urging force of the urging means, while the target member is When displacing, the preload of the urging means is reduced, and the urging force of the urging means can be suppressed from becoming a resistance when displacing the target member.

  In the case of the second direction, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member can be changed without changing the magnitude of the preload of the urging means. Therefore, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member is switched between a direction coinciding with the displacement direction of the target member and a non-parallel direction, or increasing or decreasing the degree of non-parallelism of the target member. Control can be performed according to a state (for example, a posture, a displacement speed, or a displacement position). For example, in the initial stage in which the target member starts to be displaced in a transitional state, the behavior of the target member becomes unstable. On the other hand, at the stage in the steady state where the displacement speed of the target member has reached a certain level, the behavior of the target member is stabilized, but the degree of non-parallelization of the direction of the biasing force is reduced to reduce the resistance. Thereby, the energy required for driving the target member can be suppressed.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine C11 is particularly effective when the target member is formed as a rack meshed with the pinion. Because the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member can be changed, the meshing state (meshing state) between the pinion and the rack can be controlled.

  In the gaming machine C11, the case where the displacement contact member is driven by the driving force of the contact member driving means has been described. However, such a contact member driving means is omitted, and the displacement contact member is elastically supported so as to be displaceable. May be. In this case, the displacement abutment member is displaced in accordance with the state of the target member so that the preload of the biasing means or / and the direction of the biasing force can be adjusted, and the displacement abutment is performed by the elastic recovery force of the elastic support. The member can be returned to the initial position. As the structure of the elastic support, for example, an elastic body is connected to a displacement contact member that can be displaced along a guide groove provided in a base member, and the displacement of the displacement contact member and the initial A structure that enables return to the position, an outer cylinder of a bush connected between the inner cylinder and the outer cylinder by a rubber-like elastic body is arranged on the base member, and a displacement contact member is arranged on the inner cylinder, An example is a structure that enables displacement of the displacement contact member and return to the initial position by elastic deformation of the bush. According to the latter structure, since the displaceable direction of the displacement contact member is not limited to one direction, the displacement direction of the displacement contact member can be the third direction described above.

  Alternatively, the contact member driving means may be omitted, and the disposition position of the displacement contact member may be manually adjusted. In this case, the preload or (and (and) of the urging means is changed in accordance with the aging of each member (for example, a decrease in the spring constant due to the set (deterioration) of the urging means, wear of the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion). ) The direction of the biasing force can be adjusted. As a structure in which the disposition position of the displacement contact member can be manually adjusted, for example, the displacement contact member can be displaced along a guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement contact member is fixed to the guide groove. A structure for adjusting the preload or the like in accordance with the position to be provided, or a plurality of support holes in which the displacement abutment member is detachably provided in the base member, and the preload or the like is adjusted in accordance with the position of the support hole in which the displacement abutment member is provided. The structure is exemplified.

<About the concept of the invention in which the second rack 364 is an example>
In a gaming machine having a driving unit for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving unit, a rack and a pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the rack A gaming machine D1 comprising: a guiding unit for guiding the rack in a state in which the rack can be displaced along a tooth surface of the pinion.

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine that displaces a displacement member by transmitting a driving force of a driving unit by a rack and a pinion (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-75550). Since the rack and the pinion can convert a rotational motion into a linear motion, the rack and the pinion are frequently used as a mechanism for linearly displacing a displacement member by a driving force (rotary motion) of a motor.

  However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and the pinion as in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, the rack is guided along the guide mechanism when performing a linear motion (linear motion), and a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. (I.e., the rack rattles in the direction in which the rack approaches and separates from the pinion), the meshing with the pinion becomes unstable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rack and the pinion for transmitting the driving force of the drive unit to the displacement member, and the guide unit for guiding the rack, the guide unit can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Since the rack is guided in such a state, even if the posture of the rack is violated, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained at a constant level, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  Note that, when the rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion, a state where the linear tooth surface of the rack is in contact with the arc-shaped tooth surface of the pinion when viewed in the axial direction of the pinion (the straight line of the tooth surface of the rack). While the rack is rotated about the axis of the pinion while maintaining the tangent to the arc of the pinion tooth surface.

  In the gaming machine D1, the rack and the pinion are provided with a base member, and the guide means is provided with a guided portion extending to the rack along a tooth surface of the rack, and a rotation of the guided portion. A gaming machine D2 comprising: a protruding portion that is slidably inserted and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D1, the guide means projects from the base member at a position opposed to the pinion shaft with the guided portion extending along the tooth surface of the rack. And a projecting portion rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion of the rack, so that when the projecting portion is slid along the guided portion, the projecting portion protrudes within the guided portion. The rack can be displaced along the guided portion while displacing the rack along the tooth surface of the pinion by relatively rotating the provided portion. Thus, even when the rack posture is unsteady, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the guided portion is formed on the rack and the projecting portion is formed in a region of the base member facing the rack, the guiding portion places the guided portion and the projecting portion on the movement trajectory of the rack. Can be arranged. That is, it is not necessary to form a portion for enabling the rack to be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion outside the outer shape of the rack, and in a dead space where other members cannot be arranged in order to avoid interference with the rack. Since they can be arranged, the space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

  The guided portion may be a concave groove formed in the surface of the rack facing the base member, or may be an elongated hole formed in the rack. In this case, it is preferable that the width dimension of the guided portion is constant along the longitudinal direction, and the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion is a circular cross section having a diameter substantially equal to or slightly smaller than the width dimension of the guided portion. preferable. This is because meshing when the rack is linearly moved while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion can be made more constant. However, the cross-sectional shape of the protruding portion may be an elliptical cross section, a polygonal cross section, or the like. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be any shape as long as it can slide along the guided portion and can rotate inside the guided portion.

  In the gaming machine D1, the rack and a pinion are provided with a base member, and the guide means is provided on the side of the rack so as to protrude from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion with the rack interposed therebetween. A first restricting portion that can be abutted; and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction, and is permitted by the second restricting portion. The gaming machine D3, wherein the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is larger than the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the guide means has the first restricting portion projecting from the base member at a position opposed to the axis of the pinion with the rack interposed therebetween, and the second restricting portion for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction. When the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion, the first and second restricting portions restrict the displacement of the rack in the width direction and displace the rack in the linear motion direction. be able to.

  In this case, the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is larger than the amount of displacement allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion, and thus the amount of displacement allowed by the second restricting portion is increased. In addition to the effects provided by the machine D1, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Thus, even when the rack posture is unsteady, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  Further, since there is no need to provide a groove or a guided portion as an opening in the rack, the rigidity of the rack can be secured and the durability can be improved accordingly. Also, by securing the rigidity of the rack, the deformation of the rack when driven by the rotation of the pinion can be suppressed, and from this point, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained at a constant level.

  In addition, it is preferable that the 1st regulation part is protrudedly provided from a base member as a rod-shaped body. This is because the rack can be easily displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion when the first contact portion abuts on the side surface of the rack to restrict the displacement of the rack. Here, examples of the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion (rod-like body) include a circular shape, an elliptical shape, a polygonal shape, and a partially combined shape thereof. In this case, it is preferable that the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion is a shape in which the side surface on the side facing (contacting) the rack is curved in an arc-shaped cross section. This is because resistance can be reduced when contacting the side surface of the rack to restrict its displacement, and the displacement of the rack can be hardly hindered.

  A gaming machine D4, wherein any of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes an urging means for applying an urging force to the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rack is provided with an urging unit for applying an urging force, and the urging force is used to assist the driving force of the driving unit. can do. For example, in a structure that raises and lowers the displacement member, a greater driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering it due to the effect of gravity acting on the displacement member. When the urging force is applied to the rack, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and the pinion, the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack is guided by the guide means, a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide means and the rack, and the posture of the rack is violated by the gap. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied to the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force to promote that the attitude of the rack is violent. On the other hand, in the present invention, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, in the structure in which the urging force is applied to the rack by the urging means, even when the rack posture is violated, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized. it can.

  As the urging means, for example, an elastic spring (coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, or the like) or an elastomer (rubber elastic body, urethane, or the like) is used as an urging force, or a magnetic force of a magnet is used. An example of a device used as an urging force is shown.

  In the gaming machine D4, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is not parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is not parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that the rack is moved to the rack. The urging force of the urging means can be applied as a force in the direction of pressing the guide means to the guide means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack from rattling and to prevent the posture from being ramped up.

  Furthermore, since the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is not parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack, even if the attitude of the rack changes once, the attitude of the rack does not change. The urging force of the urging means can be applied as the force in the direction to converge. Therefore, the meshing of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted stably.

  The translation direction of the rack means a direction in which the rack driven by the rotation of the pinion is displaced, and is a direction along the tooth surface of the rack. In this case, in the gaming machine D5, since the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion (the rack can rotate around the axis of the pinion), the linear movement direction of the rack changes according to the rotation position of the rack. Is done.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a gaming machine D6 including a linear motion restricting means for restricting a displacement of the rack in the translation direction at a predetermined position in the translation direction.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, since the linear motion regulating means for regulating the displacement of the rack in the translational direction at a predetermined position in the translational direction is provided, the regulation Thus, the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced. For example, in a structure in which the displacement member is raised and lowered, in order to stop and hold the displacement member at the ascending position, it is necessary to resist gravity acting on the displacement member. Since the displacement of the rack in the translation direction can be regulated by the translation control means, the driving force required for the drive means can be reduced (or the drive stopped). As a result, it is possible to suppress energy consumption of the driving unit when the displacement member is held at a predetermined position (for example, an ascending position).

  In the gaming machine D6, there is provided an urging means for applying an urging force to the rack, and the linear motion restricting means is configured to be able to engage with a first engaging portion formed on the rack and the first engaging portion. And a second engaging portion formed on the guide means, wherein the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, and A gaming machine D7 in a direction in which the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are engaged.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D6, the linear motion restricting means is formed on the first engaging portion formed on the rack and the guiding means formed to be engageable with the first engaging portion. A second engaging portion formed, the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means is non-parallel to the direction of linear movement of the rack, and the first engaging portion and the second Since the direction of engagement is with the engagement portion, the engagement of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion and the release thereof can be performed with the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction.

  That is, the rack is displaceable along the tooth surface of the pinion (rotatable about the axis of the pinion), and the urging force of the urging means urges the rack in a direction in which the rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, for example, when the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is formed as an uneven engagement, when the rack is displaced to a predetermined position in the linear motion direction, the concave and convex portions are formed. When the racks are aligned with each other, the rack can be rotated by the urging force of the urging means to form the engagement of the concave-convex shape (the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion) (a convex is inserted into the concave), and The engagement can be maintained by the urging force of the urging means. On the other hand, when the pinion is driven from this state, the rack is rotated in a direction to release the engagement of the uneven shape while resisting the urging force of the urging means, thereby releasing the engagement of the uneven shape (from the concave portion). The protrusion can be extracted), and the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction.

  The gaming machine D7 further includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed, and the guide unit includes a guided portion extending along the tooth surface of the rack and a guided portion that rotates on the guided portion. Protruding portion that is inserted slidably and slidably and that protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion. A gaming machine D8 formed by a recess formed in an inner wall surface of a guided portion of the guiding means, and wherein the second engaging portion is formed by a projecting portion of the guiding means.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the guide means is inserted into the guided portion extending to the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion and faces the shaft of the pinion. And a projecting portion projecting from the base member at a position where the game machine D2 is provided. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the linear motion restricting means is formed in the guided portion of the guide means, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and it is possible to improve the space efficiency and to regulate the linear motion. Since the second engaging portion of the means is formed by the protruding portion of the guide means, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly as a part. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine D7, the rack and a pinion are provided with a base member, and the guide means is provided on the side of the rack so as to protrude from the base member at a position opposed to an axis of the pinion with the rack interposed therebetween. A first restricting portion that can be abutted; and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction, and is permitted by the second restricting portion. The amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is made larger than the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion, and the linear motion restricting means includes A gaming machine D9, wherein a joining portion is formed by a concave portion provided on a side surface of the rack, and the second engaging portion is formed by a second regulating portion of the guide means.

  According to the gaming machine D9, the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position opposed to the axis of the pinion with the rack interposed therebetween, and can be brought into contact with the side surface of the rack, and in the width direction of the rack. And a second restricting portion formed on the base member to restrict the displacement of the rack. The amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction allowed by the second restricting portion is between the first restricting portion and the pinion. Since it is made larger than the allowable displacement amount of the rack in the width direction, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D3 is achieved. In this case, since the first engagement portion of the linear motion restricting means is formed on the side surface of the rack, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, so that space efficiency can be improved, and the linear motion restricting means can be improved. Since the two engaging portions are formed by the second restricting portions of the guide means, the components can be shared and the number of components can be reduced accordingly. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be achieved.

  The gaming machine D6 further includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are provided, and the guide means includes a guided portion as a groove extending to the rack along a tooth surface of the rack; A projecting portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide portion and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion; and A first engaging portion formed by increasing a depth of a recess in a part of the guided portion, and a distal end side of the projecting portion of the guiding means is formed to be engageable with the first engaging portion; A gaming machine D10.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the guide means is provided with a guided portion as a concave groove extending to the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and is rotatable on the guided portion. Since it is provided with a protruding portion that is slidably inserted and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D2 is achieved. In this case, the linear motion restricting means includes a first engaging portion formed by increasing the depth of a part of the guided portion of the guiding means, and the first engaging portion is provided with the projecting portion of the guiding means. Since the distal end side of the portion is formed so as to be engageable, the engagement and disengagement of the first engagement portion and the protruding member can be performed with the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction.

  In addition, since the first engaging portion of the linear motion restricting means is formed by partially increasing the depth of the groove (guided portion) of the rack, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, thereby improving the space efficiency. In addition, since the portion for engaging with the first engaging portion is formed by the projecting portion of the guide means, the component can be used as well, and the number of components can be reduced accordingly. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine D11, a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a protruding direction by a spring is provided on the tip side of the protruding portion, and the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is engaged with the first engagement portion. Is preferred. This is because the engagement between the first engagement portion and the distal end side of the protruding portion and the release of the engagement can be smoothly performed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, comprising: a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed; and a cover member disposed on the base member so as to face the rack and the pinion, and the base member and the cover member The gaming machine D11, wherein the displacement of the rack is regulated by the opposing surface of the rack, and a connecting portion for connecting the base member and the cover member is provided near the rack.

  Here, the rack and the pinion are arranged on the base member, and the cover member is covered on the base member, and the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member make the rack in the thickness direction (that is, the base member and the cover member). There is known a gaming machine having a structure for restricting displacement in a facing direction. In this case, if the distance between the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member is unstable, the displacement of the rack in the thickness direction is insufficiently regulated, which adversely affects the state of engagement with the pinion. However, if the number of connecting portions that connect the base member and the cover member is increased in order to stabilize the distance between the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member, the product cost increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11, since the connecting portion for connecting the base member and the cover member is disposed near the rack, the base member and the cover are provided. It is possible to mainly stabilize the interval of a region of the facing surface of the member that contributes to the regulation of the displacement of the rack. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of connecting portions, reduce the product cost, and sufficiently restrict the displacement of the rack in the thickness direction, thereby stabilizing the meshing state with the pinion.

  In the gaming machine D11, the rack is provided with an opening formed as an elongated hole-shaped opening, and the connecting portion is inserted into the opening of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D12, the rack is provided with the opening formed in the shape of the elongated hole, and the connecting portion is inserted into the opening of the rack, so that the base member and the cover member are connected at the position closest to the rack. Can be connected by a part. Therefore, the distance between the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member, which is most suitable for restricting the displacement of the rack, can be stabilized. As a result, while minimizing the number of connection parts and reducing product costs, even with the minimum connection parts, the displacement of the rack in the thickness direction is maximized, and the meshing state with the pinion is ensured. Can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine D12, the guide means is inserted along the tooth surface of the rack as an elongated hole-shaped opening in the rack, and is rotatably and slidably inserted through the guided portion. And a projecting portion projecting from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion, and the opening is formed by the guided portion, and the connecting portion is formed by the projecting portion. A gaming machine D13 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D12, the guide means is provided with a guided portion extending along the tooth surface of the rack and a rotatable and slidable sliding member. Since it is provided with a protruding portion which is inserted and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the axis of the pinion, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D2 is achieved. In this case, since the opening is formed by the guided portion and the connecting portion is formed by the protruding portion, the space efficiency can be improved and the product cost can be reduced. That is, since the connecting portion is provided by using the guided portion (opening) formed in the rack, the connecting portion does not need to be provided outside the outer shape of the rack. Can be arranged outside the outer shape of the rack, and the space efficiency can be improved. Further, a guided portion and a protruding portion constituting guide means for guiding the displacement of the rack are provided with a connecting portion for connecting and fixing the base member and the cover member to each other and an opening for inserting the connecting portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D14, wherein in the gaming machine D12 or D13, the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by the connecting portion abutting on the end of the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D12 or D13, the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by the contact of the connecting portion with the end of the opening, thereby improving the space efficiency. Product cost can be reduced. For example, a structure in which a stopper wall that abuts against the side surface of the rack is erected from the base member and the side surface of the rack abuts on the stopper wall to restrict the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is considered. In the structure, the space in which other members can be disposed outside the outer shape of the rack is reduced by the amount of the stopper wall. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D14, since the connecting portion corresponding to the stopper wall does not need to be disposed outside the outer shape of the rack, other members can be disposed outside the outer shape of the rack accordingly. Thus, space efficiency can be improved. In addition, in addition to the function of connecting and fixing the base member and the cover member to the connecting portion, the stopper function for restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction can be combined, so that the components can be used accordingly. The points can be reduced, and the cost of the product can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D14, the base member and the cover member are formed of a resin material, and the connecting portion is erected from one of the base member or the cover member, and the erected front end is formed of the base member or the cover member. The other side is fastened by a metal screw, and in the state of being fastened by the screw, the metal screw is buried inside the connection portion along the standing direction of the connection portion. Machine D15.

  According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D14, the upstanding end side of the connecting portion that is provided upright from one of the base member and the cover member is fastened to the other of the base member and the cover member by a metal screw. That is, when the base member and the cover member are connected and fixed by the connecting member, the metal screw is embedded in the connecting portion, so that the rigidity of the connecting portion can be increased. Thus, when the displacement of the rack is restricted by bringing the connecting portion into contact with the end of the opening, damage to the connecting portion can be prevented, and durability can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Interposed Member 370 as an Example>
One side member and the other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other end side are respectively bridged between the one side member and the other side member and are guided by the one side member and the other side member. In a gaming machine having a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, an intervening member interposed between the one side member and the other side member is provided. Gaming machine E1.

  Here, the one-side member and the other-side member opposingly arranged at a predetermined interval, a displacement member bridged between the one-side member and the other-side member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member There is known a gaming machine provided with (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-14602). According to this gaming machine, the one side member is formed so as to be able to guide one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the other side member is formed so as to be able to guide the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. Thus, the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, the rigidity of the entire unit (a structure in which a displacement member is provided between one side member and the other side member) is low, and the unit is easily damaged, so that handling in the unit state is difficult. There was a problem that it is. For this reason, for example, in the transporting step of transporting such a unit or the attaching step of attaching the unit to a mating member, it is necessary to handle the unit so that a large load is not applied to it, resulting in deterioration of workability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the interposed member interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member is provided, the rigidity of the unit can be improved by forming the entire unit into a frame shape. Therefore, handling in the unit state can be facilitated. Therefore, for example, the allowable value of the load applied to the unit is eased in the transporting process and the mounting process, so that the workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine E1, a pair of racks respectively connected to one end side and the other end side of the displacement member and disposed so as to be able to move directly to the one side member and the other side member, and the pair of racks have teeth respectively. And a pair of pinions that are rotatably disposed on the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively, and to which the driving force of the driving unit is applied, and in a posture along a longitudinal direction in a linear motion direction of the rack. A pair of rods fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively, wherein the rack is connected to the rod-shaped body, and a connection portion thereof is slid along the rod-shaped body. A gaming machine E2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the rods are fixed to the one side member and the other side member, respectively, and the rack is connected to the rods. Can be connected to the one-side member and the other-side member through the member, thereby forming a closed connection loop between the displacement member, the one-side member, and the other-side member and the interposed member. That is, in the conventional product, the connection loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinions disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the displacement member is not connected to the one side member and the other side member. According to the gaming machine E2, the displacement member can be connected to the one-side member and the other-side member via the rack and the bar-like member (forming a closed connection loop). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire unit can be increased. Further, since the rod-shaped body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member is improved accordingly. This also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the entire unit.

  In addition, that the rod-shaped body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member means that the rod-shaped body formed separately from the one-side member and the other-side member is attached and fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member ( For example, the present invention is not limited to the case where fastening and fixing are performed, but also includes a case where a rod-shaped body is integrally formed with one side member and the other side member (for example, integrally by resin molding using a molding die). Further, it is preferable that the rod is formed of a metal material. This is because, when the one-side member and the other-side member are formed from a resin material, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member and the stabilization of the posture of the rack can be efficiently improved. The driving force of the driving means may be applied to only one of the pair of racks, or may be applied to both of the pair of racks.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a ball screw mechanism having a nut, a screw shaft, and a plurality of balls interposed between spiral grooves of the nut and the screw shaft, wherein the nut is connected to one end and the other end of the displacement member. Respectively, and the screw shaft is disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the screw shaft of the ball screw mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the displacement member A gaming machine E3 characterized by being displaced along a screw axis of a screw mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is connected to the one side member and the other side member via the ball screw mechanism, so that the displacement member is connected to the one side member and the other side member. A closed connection loop with the installation member can be formed. That is, in the conventional product, the connection loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinions disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the displacement member is not connected to the one side member and the other side member. According to the gaming machine E3, the displacement member can be connected to the one-side member and the other-side member via the ball screw mechanism (forming a closed connection loop). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire unit can be increased. Further, since the screw shaft is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member is improved accordingly. This also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the entire unit.

  Further, in the rack and the pinion, the state of the displacement member is likely to be unstable because the meshing state varies greatly. On the other hand, in the ball screw structure, since a plurality of balls are interposed between the helical groove of the nut and the screw shaft, the fluctuation of the meshing state is extremely small. Therefore, for example, as in the case of the gaming machine E2, it is not necessary to separately provide a rod-shaped body. That is, for example, in the gaming machine E2, the first configuration (rack and pinion) for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the improvement of the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member, and the stabilization of the attitude of the rack Although the two configurations with the second configuration (bar-shaped body) for achieving the conversion are formed by separate members, according to the gaming machine E3, these two configurations are formed by one member (ball screw mechanism). it can.

  In the structure in which one end of the displacement member is guided to one side member, and the other end is guided to the other side member, the guide between the one side member and the guide by the other side member easily shifts, It is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, not only does the load on the driving means become excessive, but also the stop of the displacement member may be caused. In this case, the structure of the gaming machine E3 that guides the displacement member by the ball screw mechanism is particularly effective for suppressing a deviation between the guide by the one side safely and the guide by the other side member.

  The gaming machine E2 or E3 includes a deformable movable mechanism, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end and the other end of the displacement member. Gaming machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the movable mechanism is provided so as to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is provided at least at one position between one end and the other end of the displacement member. Between the guide by the one-side member and the guide by the other-side member (that is, the shift between the rack of the one-side member and the rack of the other-side member, or the one-side member). Even if a shift occurs between the nut on the side and the nut on the other member), the shift can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be displaced stably.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine E4, a bar or a screw shaft is provided on one side member and the other side member, and the rack is connected to the bar, and the nut is connected to the screw shaft via a ball. Or the posture of the nut can be stabilized. Accordingly, when a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member of the displacement member, the movable mechanism itself can be easily deformed, and the function of absorbing the deviation by the movable mechanism is reliably exhibited. be able to.

  The gaming machine E5, wherein in any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the interposed member is displaceably connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the interposed member is displaceably connected to at least one of the one side member and the other side member. The relative positions of the side member and the other side member and the interposed member can be adjusted. Therefore, when attaching a unit (a structure in which an interposed member is interposed between one side member for guiding the displacement member and the other side member) to an object to be attached, for example, the one side member and the other side member or the intermediate member After one of the installation members is attached, even if the other is misaligned with respect to the attachment position, the other position can be adjusted to the attachment position and attached. As a result, the workability of the mounting operation can be improved.

  In particular, when a movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position of the displacement member as in the gaming machine E4, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be used, so that the workability of the mounting work for mounting the unit to the mounting target is improved. Can be achieved.

  In addition, as the aspect of the displacement of the interposed member with respect to the one side member and the other side member, for example, rotation by a pivot, linear or curved slide displacement by a guide groove, displacement in an arbitrary direction by loose fitting, or For example, displacement in a direction in which the elastic body is elastically deformed by the elastic support is allowed.

  In the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the interposed member are connected at a single connection point, and the connection point is displaceably connected by fastening with a screw. A gaming machine E6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the interposed member are connected at one place, and the connection point is fastened by screws. Since the connection is performed in a displaceable state, relative rotation of the interposed member with respect to the one side member or the other side member can be allowed using the screw as the rotation axis. Therefore, when the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member for guiding the displacement member) is mounted on the mounting target, the mounting position with respect to the mounting target can be adjusted. The workability of the mounting operation can be improved.

  Furthermore, after the unit is mounted on the mounting target, the unit can be fixed to the mounting target so as not to be displaceable by the fastening force of the screw. That is, in a state before the unit is mounted, the fastening of the screw is temporarily fixed, and the mounting position can be adjusted by the relative displacement described above, and the fastening of the screw is fully fixed (re-tightened) in the mounting operation. The unit can be firmly fixed to the mounting object.

  In addition, as a structure for fixing the unit so as not to be displaceable with respect to the mounting object, for example, a screw is formed as a tapping screw, fastened to a connecting portion between one side member or the other side member and the interposed member, and a tapping screw In this case, the unit is fixed in such a manner that it can be relatively rotated and the tip of the tapping screw is fastened to an object to be mounted, so that the entire body is fixed so as not to be displaced by the axial force of the tapping screw.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the intervening member are connected so as to be displaceable by engagement.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the interposed member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement, so that the one side member Alternatively, the unit (a structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member that guides the displacement member) is attached to the object to be attached while allowing relative displacement of the interposed member with respect to the other member. Since separate parts such as screws for connecting the two can be eliminated while improving workability at the time, product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  As the engagement that can be engaged and displaced, there are a form in which the other shaft is rotatably inserted into one hole, a form in which the other shaft is slidably inserted into one groove, and another protrusion that is inserted into one recess. Are slidably fitted to each other.

  Any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, comprising: a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member; and a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member. The gaming machine E8 wherein the biasing force of the means is applied to the interposed member so that the interposed member is maintained between the one side member and the other side member. .

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the urging means disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member to apply an urging force to the target member is provided. Since the biasing force of the biasing means is applied to the interposed member so that the state in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member is maintained, the one side member and At least the interposed member can be temporarily fixed to the other side member. Therefore, even when the interposed member is interposed in a displaceable state with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member, the unit (the displacing member is guided by the temporary fixing using the urging force of the urging means). (A structure in which an interposed member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member) can be improved in the operation efficiency when the object is attached to an object to be attached.

  Further, the urging force of the urging means can be used not only for urging the target member but also for fixing the interposed member to the one-side member and the other-side member. Man-hours can be reduced.

  In addition, as a form in which the urging force of the urging means acts on the interposed member, one end of the urging means is connected to the target member, and the other end is connected to the interposed member to apply the urging force to the interposed member. In the first mode or when the target member is disposed on each of the one-side member and the other-side member, one end of the urging means is connected to one of the target members and the other target member. A second mode in which the other end of the urging means is connected, and an intermediate portion between the one end and the other end of the urging means is brought into contact with the interposed member to apply an urging force to the interposed member is exemplified. You.

  In the first embodiment, the target member and the urging means may be provided on only one of the one-side member and the other-side member, and the target member and the bias member may be provided on the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively. The urging means may be provided, and the other ends of both the urging means may be connected to the interposed members. In the former case, for example, in a structure in which the target member and the urging means are provided only on one side member of the one side member and the other side member, one end side of the interposed member is recessed into the one side member and The other end of the interposed member is rotatably connected to another member by a pivotal support, and the urging force of the urging means is set in a direction in which the convex is inserted into the recess. A form in which an urging force is applied to the interposed member so that the force is applied is exemplified. According to this aspect, the interposition member is rotated by the applied urging force about the pivot on the other end side, and the uneven engagement can be formed by the rotation, so that the number of the urging means is one. Even in the case where only the urging force is applied, it is possible to reliably maintain the engagement (the state where the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member).

  Further, as the target member, a rack and a pinion are disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, and the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is linearly moved. Thus, a rack having a structure for displacing the displacement member is exemplified.

  In any of the gaming machines E5 to E8, when the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, the connection member is connected in a state where displacement in a three-dimensional direction is allowed. Gaming machine E9.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E5 to E8, when the interposed member is displaceably connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, the three-dimensional structure is achieved. Since the connection is performed in a state where the displacement in the direction is allowed, the adjustment width of the relative position between the one-side member and the other-side member and the interposed member can be increased. Therefore, when attaching a unit (a structure in which an intervening member is interposed between one side member for guiding the displacement member and the other side member) to an object to be attached, for example, the one side member, the other side member, and the Even when the mounting surfaces of the installation members are not parallel to each other, the posture of each of the members can be adjusted with respect to the mounting surface. As a result, the workability of the mounting operation can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the game machine includes a base member to which the one-side member, the other-side member, and the interposed member are attached, and at least one-side member and the other-side member are displaceable with respect to the base member. A gaming machine E10 attached in a state.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E9, at least one side member and the other side member are attached to the base member in a displaceable state, so that the displacement member is displaced. Can be stabilized. That is, the one-side member and the other-side member are not rigidly connected to the base member but are attached in a displaceable state, and the displacement (that is, rattling or wobbling) is used to make use of the displacement member. The deviation between the guide by one side member and the guide by the other side member can be absorbed, and as a result, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In addition, the object attached in a displaceable state to the base member is a case where the interposed member is displaceably connected to the one side member and the other side member as in the gaming machines E5 to E9. In this case, only one side member and the other side member may be provided, and in addition, the interposition member may be attached in a displaceable state. On the other hand, when the interposed member is connected to the one-side member and the other-side member in a non-displaceable state (that is, when the interposed member is rigidly connected), the connection between the one-side member and the other-side member and the interposed member is prevented. Both are attached so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member.

  In the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, a biasing unit that applies a biasing force to the target member, and an intermediate portion of the biasing member. And a contact member, wherein the contact member is disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, a biasing unit that applies a biasing force to the target member, A contact member that is in contact with an intermediate portion of the urging member, and the contact member is disposed on the base member, so that one of the one-side member and the other-side member (that is, the target member is disposed) Is displaced with respect to the base member (that is, rattling or wobbling occurs), the relative position between one of the one-side member and the other-side member and the contact member can be changed. . Therefore, by changing the relative position, the contact position of the contact member with respect to the urging means can be changed, and the urging means can be bent or the degree of bending of the urging means can be changed. The direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member can be changed. That is, in accordance with one of the states of the one-side member and the other-side member (change in posture with respect to the base member), the biasing direction to the target member can be actively controlled only by a mechanical structure.

  Note that, as the target member, a rack and a pinion are provided on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, and the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is linearly moved. Thus, a rack having a structure for displacing the displacement member is exemplified. Here, when one of the one-side member and the other-side member (where the rack is disposed) is displaced (rattles or wobble) with respect to the base member, the posture of the displacement member changes due to the rattle. As a result, the attitude of the rack is changed, and the meshing state with the pinion becomes unstable. In this case, according to the gaming machine E11, as described above, the biasing direction to the target member (rack) is actively controlled in accordance with one of the states of the one-side member and the other-side member (change in posture). Therefore, the urging direction of the urging means applied to the rack can be changed in a direction in which the meshing state with the pinion is stabilized.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a second pinion directly or indirectly connected to the pinion, and a second rack meshed with the second pinion, and the second rack is driven by the driving unit. By rotating the second pinion, the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion accompanying the rotation of the second pinion, and the displacement member is displaced. A game machine E12 driven by the driving means via a computer.

  Here, in the gaming machine E12, a two-stage rack structure in which the linear motion of the second rack is transmitted to the second pinion and the pinion and converted into rotational motion, and then the rotation is transmitted from the pinion to the rack and converted into linear motion. By adopting, the stroke amount of the linear motion is secured. In such a two-stage rack structure, if a structure in which the second rack is driven by the driving means via the third pinion is adopted, the second rack is provided with a tooth surface for the second pinion and a tooth surface for the third pinion. , Respectively, and the size of the second rack in the longitudinal direction increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E2, since the second rack is driven by the driving means via the crank mechanism, the tooth surface for the third pinion can be eliminated. The length of the second rack in the longitudinal direction can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine E12, the crank mechanism has an eccentric pin protruding at a position eccentric from a center of rotation and is rotated by a driving force of a driving unit; A gaming machine E13 comprising: a rack groove through which an eccentric pin is slidably inserted.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E12, by rotating the rotating body by the driving force of the driving means, the eccentric pin positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is positioned in the rack groove of the second rack. , And the second rack can be moved linearly.

  Note that the rack groove may be a concave groove formed in the second rack, or may be an opening (through hole) formed in the second rack. Further, it is preferable that the extending direction of the rack groove is set to a direction orthogonal to the linear movement direction of the second rack. It is possible to suppress the generation of a component other than the linear movement direction of the second rack in the force component acting on the rack groove of the second rack from the eccentric pin of the rotating body. This is because it can be moved directly.

In the gaming machine E12, a protruding pin protruding from a surface of the rack facing the one side member or the other side member, and a protruding pin of the rack extending from the one side member or the other side member and slidably inserted therethrough. With a guide groove that is
The crank mechanism has an eccentric pin protruding at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and a rotating body that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and the eccentric pin of the rotating body is rotatably inserted into the second rack. With a formed shaft hole,
In the guide groove of the one side member or the other side member, the second rack is displaced with the rotation of the rotating body of the crank mechanism, and the projecting pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove. The gaming machine E14, wherein the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E12, the eccentric pin positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole of the second rack, so that the driving force of the driving means is provided. When the rotating body is rotated by the rotation of the rotating body, the protruding pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove extending from the one side member or the other side member with the rotation of the rotating body. Can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion. Therefore, even when the attitude of the rack is deviated, the engagement between the second rack and the second pinion can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  The connection between the second rack and the crank mechanism (rotary body) is performed by rotatably inserting an eccentric pin into the shaft hole. That is, the second rack is formed with a shaft hole having a circular cross section. Since there is no need to extend an elongated groove for sliding (sliding) the eccentric pin, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rigidity of the second rack.

  In addition, that the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion means that, when viewed in the axial direction of the second pinion, the linear tooth surface of the second rack corresponds to the arc-shaped tooth surface of the second pinion. This means an operation in which the second rack is rotated about the axis of the second pinion while maintaining a state of contact with the second rack (a state in which the straight line of the rack tooth surface is tangent to the arc of the pinion tooth surface).

  Further, the guide groove may be a concave groove formed in one side member or the other side member, or may be an opening (through hole) formed in the one side member or the other side member.

  A gaming machine E15, comprising any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, which comprises a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the crank mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, since the detecting device for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism is provided, the rack is moved to one end of the linear movement range based on the detection result. And that it has reached the other end, ie, that the displacement member has reached the start and end, respectively.

  In this case, in order to detect that the displacement member has reached the start end and the end, respectively, in a structure in which the detection means detects that the rack has reached one end and the other end of the linear movement range, respectively, in the linear movement range of the rack. Although it is necessary to dispose a detection unit (sensor) at one end and the other end, there is a problem that the wiring is long since these two positions are separated from each other. In other words, the longer length not only increases the member cost, but also makes it difficult to route the wiring to avoid interference with other members, thus deteriorating the degree of freedom of design and causing the member to be caught by the movable member. The risk of disconnection at

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, since the rotation position (phase) of the crank mechanism is detected by the detecting means, one end of the rotation range of the crank and the other end are detected. Even if the detection units (sensors) are provided at the ends, they can be provided close to each other. Therefore, since the wiring can be shortened, not only the cost of members can be reduced, but also the degree of freedom of design and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed.

  In addition, the crank mechanism has a crankpin protruding at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, a rotating body rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a recess through which the crankpin of the rotating body is slidably inserted. An example is a structure including a crank groove that is provided in the second rack as a groove. In this case, the detecting means detects the rotational position (phase) of the rotating body of the crank mechanism by the detecting unit (sensor).

<About the concept of the invention in which the upper arm body 435 or the lower arm body 436 is an example>
Effect member, a displacement means for displacing the effect member between the retracted position and the effect position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, the effect member in the effect position in a predetermined posture In the gaming machine formed so as to be disposable, the displacing means includes a base member and an arm body having one end rotatably connected to the base member and the effect member disposed displaceably on the other end. Defining means for defining the attitude of the effect member with respect to the arm member, wherein the arm member is rotated about the one end side with respect to the base member, so that the effect member is in a retracted position and an effect position. A gaming machine F1 which is displaced between a position and a position.

  Here, a directing member, a displacing means for displacing the directing member between the retracted position and the directing position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacing means are provided, and the displacing means comprises a parallel link mechanism. There has been known a gaming machine in which an effect member can be arranged at an effect position in a predetermined posture (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-28226).

  That is, the parallel link mechanism includes a first arm and a second arm which are parallel to each other and have the same length and are interposed between the effect member and the base member, and the first arm and the second arm are parallel to each other. While rotating with respect to the base member. For this reason, it is possible to displace the effect member while maintaining the posture of the effect member constant, and thus it is possible to arrange the effect member in the predetermined position at the effect position.

  However, in a structure in which the displacement means uses a parallel link mechanism as in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the interference between the first arm and the second arm occurs, the operating range of the effect member is narrow. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the displacement means includes a base member, and an arm body having one end rotatably connected to the base member and the effect member disposed displaceably at the other end. And defining means for defining the attitude of the effect member with respect to the arm body. Therefore, when the arm body is rotated with respect to the base member about one end thereof, the defining means defines the attitude of the effect member. It can be displaced, so that the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture. In this case, since the interference of the arm body does not occur, the operation range of the effect member can be secured.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means includes a pair of the arm bodies, one end sides of the pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect member is the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. The pair of arm members each have teeth formed at one end thereof, and the one end is rotatably connected to the base member in a state where the teeth are meshed with each other. The gaming machine F2, wherein the effect members arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm members are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies, and the pair of arm bodies is rotatably connected at one end to the base member, and is arranged such that the effecting member is respectively displaceable at the other end. Then, the pair of arm members are rotated about the one end thereof with respect to the base member, so that the effect members disposed on the other end sides of the pair of arm members abut against each other at the effect position.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, the pair of arms each have teeth formed at one end thereof, and the base member is in a state where the teeth are meshed with each other. Is rotatably connected at one end, so that the rotation of the pair of arms can be synchronized. Thereby, it is possible to bring the effect members arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies into accurate contact with each other at the effect position. Further, if one of the pair of arm members is rotated, the other is also driven and rotated, so that the pair of arm members (producing members) can be operated by one driving unit.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, at the retreat position, the arm body has a posture along a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, in the retracted position, the arm body is in a posture along the vertical direction, so that the weight of the effect member can be supported by the arm body. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the driving means required to hold the effect member at the retracted position. In this way, it is impossible for the conventional product using the parallel link mechanism to make the arm body in the vertical position at the retreat position (since the second arm interferes with the first arm), This is made possible for the first time by the present invention. Thereby, the energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means includes a slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and the effect member is slidably disposed on the slide member. As the arm body is rotated about one end thereof, the slide body is slid with respect to the base member, and the effect member is slid with respect to the slide body. A gaming machine F1 in which a posture of the effect member with respect to a body is defined.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means includes a slide member slidably displaceable on the base member, and the effect member is slidably displaceable on the slide member. The arm member is rotated about one end thereof so that the slide member can be slid with respect to the base member and the effect member can be slid with respect to the slide member. Posture can be defined. Thus, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture.

  In the gaming machine F4, the base member includes a guide shaft extending along a direction of sliding displacement of the slide body, and a pair of guide shafts extending parallel to the guide shaft and facing each other at a predetermined interval. An opposing wall portion, the upper end of the slide body is suspended and supported by a guide shaft of the base member so as to be slidable, and the lower end is loosely fitted between a pair of opposing wall portions of the base member. A gaming machine F5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, the resistance when the slide body is slid and displaced with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the effect member is rotated by rotating the arm body about one end thereof. Can be smoothly performed.

  For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are provided on a base member and one end and the other end of the slide body are guided by each of the pair of guide shafts so as to be slidable, the sliding portion becomes two places and the frictional resistance is increased. Increase. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since the sliding portion can be one, the frictional resistance when the sliding body slides can be suppressed. Further, according to the gaming machine F4, since the slide body is suspended and supported by the guide shaft of the base member, even if the slide body vibrates and the lower end side of the slide body abuts on the opposing wall of the base member. In addition, the slide body can be self-corrected to a posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the slide body can be returned to a state in which the lower end side is loosely fitted between the pair of opposed walls of the base member. Therefore, also from this point, the frictional resistance when the slide body is slid can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the displacement means includes a pair of arm members whose one end is rotatably connected to the base member, and is capable of displacing the effect member to the other end of the pair of arm members. And the defining means connects the effect members arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm members, and at least one of the connecting portions with the effect member is slidable. A slide connection member is provided, and with the arm body being rotated about one end thereof, at least one of the connection portions is slid and displaced, and the pair of effect members are respectively displaced. A gaming machine F6, wherein a posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body is defined.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means connects the effect members provided respectively on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies, and connects the effect members with the effect members. Since at least one of the connecting portions is provided with a slide connecting member which is slidable, at least one of the connecting portions is slid while the arm is rotated about one end thereof. , A pair of effect members can be displaced, and the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body can be defined. Thus, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture.

  Further, in the gaming machine F6, two sets (one pair) of an arm body and an effect member arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the effect members of each set are connected by a slide connecting member. Since the attitude of the effecting member with respect to the arm body can be defined by connecting the slide members so as to be slidable by the (defining means), it is necessary to provide a hanging structure (slide body) as in the case of the gaming machine F4 or F5, for example. Absent. That is, since the weight can be reduced by the omission of the slide body, the play of the effect member can be suppressed only by the arm body, even if the suspension structure is omitted.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, two sets of the arm body and the effect member arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the sets are arranged to face each other. At the same time, in the retreat position, the effect members are separated from each other at a predetermined interval, and the effect member from which the arm body is rotated about one end thereof from the retreat position is disposed at the effect position. And the effect member causes the contact surfaces to contact each other, and one of the contact surfaces is provided with a positioning projection, and the other is contacted with the other contact surface. A positioning concave portion that extends along a locus of the positioning convex portion when the arm body is rotated and that receives the positioning convex portion is recessed, and an engaging portion is formed in the positioning convex portion. At the same time, in the positioning recess, Gaming machine F7, characterized in that if possible the engaged portion is formed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, each set is arranged facing each other, and in the retreat position, the effect members of each set are separated from each other at a predetermined interval. When the arm body is rotated about one end thereof, the effect members of each set are displaced in a direction approaching each other, and in the effect member, the contact surfaces of the effect members of each group are brought into contact with each other. Can be done.

  In this case, one of the abutting surfaces of the directing members is provided with a positioning projection on one of the abutting surfaces, and the other abutting surface is provided with a positioning member for rotating the arm body. Since the positioning recesses that extend along the trajectory of the projections and receive the positioning projections are recessed, the positioning projections and the positioning recesses can be engaged with each other at the rendering position, thereby positioning the rendering members. . That is, the effect members of each set are close to each other in the locus of the circular motion, so in the case of a concave shape and a convex shape having the same dimensions, the convex shape cannot be engaged with these concave shapes, but the positioning concave portion is Since the positioning body is extended along the locus of the positioning protrusion when the arm body is rotated, the positioning protrusion can be received (engaged) in the positioning recess.

  On the other hand, the positioning of the effect members by the engagement of the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion is limited to a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning concave portion. That is, in order to allow the positioning concave portion to accept the positioning convex portion even in the locus of the circular motion of the rendering member, since the positioning concave portion extends along the locus of the positioning convex portion, the positioning concave portion extends in the extending direction of the positioning concave portion. Therefore, the positioning projection cannot be engaged. Therefore, it is not possible to position the effect members in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and rattling occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the engaging portion is formed in the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion engageable with the engaging portion is formed in the positioning concave portion. In the position, the engaging portion and the engaged portion can be engaged with each other. As a result, the directing members can be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning concave portion, and the occurrence of rattling can be suppressed. .

  Here, it is also conceivable to omit the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion and provide only the engaging portion and the engaged portion to perform the positioning between the effect members. However, in this case, it is difficult to engage the engaging portion and the engaged portion due to rattling or wobbling of the effecting member due to elastic deformation or dimensional tolerance of the arm body. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F7, the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion are engaged first, and after the effect members are positioned, the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged. It is possible to suppress the above-described effects of the staging and wobbling of the effect member, and to reliably engage the engaging portion and the engaged portion.

  In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a projecting direction by a spring, and one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed. The other is a gaming machine F8 formed as a spherical concave portion that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a projecting direction by a spring. Since the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spherical concave portion that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism, the ball can be retracted with the operation of the effect members approaching each other. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation from when the positioning projection is received by the positioning recess to when the engaging portion and the engaged portion engage, and at the same time, the engagement portion and the engaging The disengagement with the joining portion can be smoothly performed in accordance with the operation when the effect member is displaced to the retracted position.

  It is preferable that the engaging portion as the ball plunger mechanism is provided in the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion as the concave portion is provided in the positioning concave portion. In this case, the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is pressed along the bottom surface of the positioning recess, and the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is retracted along the bottom surface of the positioning recess while achieving smooth movement by retracting the ball. This is because the ball (engaging portion) and the concave portion (engaged portion) can be reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is a direction that is attracted to the one magnet by a magnetic force. A gaming machine F9 characterized by being formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic pole of the game machine F9.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed of one magnet. Since it is formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic pole in the direction of being attracted by the magnetic force, after the positioning protrusion is received in the positioning recess, it can be attracted to each other by the magnetic force. Even when a displacement occurs between the engaging portion and the engaged portion, both can be accurately engaged (magnetically attached). As a result, it is possible to accurately position the effect members at the effect position.

  In one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, one side member and the other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and the one side member and the other side member are provided between the one side member and the other side member. A displacement member that is displaced while being guided at one end side and the other end side; and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member, wherein the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the displacement member. A gaming machine F17 comprising a body, wherein the rotating body is rotated by a driving force transmitted from the effect member when the effect member is disposed at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine F17, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, one end of the displacement member can be guided by one member and the other end of the displacement member can be guided by the other member. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced along the one side member and the other side member by the driving force of the driving means. In addition, the rotating body disposed on the displacement member can be rotated by the driving force transmitted from the rendering member disposed at the rendering position.

  In this case, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided separately to the one side member and the other end side is guided separately to the other side member, a deviation is easily generated between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member. However, it has been difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, not only does the load on the driving means become excessive, but also the stop of the displacement member may be caused.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F17, since the rotating body is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the rendering member disposed at the rendering position, the driving means for rotating the rotating body is disposed on the displacement member. Installation can be omitted. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the weight of the entire displacement member, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift between the guide by one side member and the guide by the other side member, and to stabilize the displacement member. And can be displaced. In addition, the size of the rotating body can be increased because the weight can be reduced.

  As means for transmitting the driving force from the rendering member disposed at the rendering position to the rotating body in order to rotate the rotating body disposed on the displacement member, for example, a gear provided on the rotating body and a rendering member The effect member is arranged at the effect position and the gear is meshed with each other, and the driving force is transmitted from the effect member to the rotating body via the gears. ), A stator (stator) is disposed on the effect member, and a driving force is transmitted between the rotor and the stator (a so-called DC motor structure), or a magnetic body is oriented on a rotating body. (Fixed magnets) are alternately arranged along the circumferential direction, and electromagnets are arranged on the directing member to transmit driving force between the electromagnets and the fixed magnets (so-called linear motors). Example) That.

<Regarding the concept of the present invention using the biasing spring 11366 as an example>
A base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, and one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member. And a pair of the target members are displaceably disposed on the base member, and the biasing unit is disposed in a bent posture. A gaming machine G1 wherein one end is directly or indirectly connected to one of the target members, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member of the pair of target members.

  Here, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, and one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member. It is known that a pair of biasing means is provided, and a pair of target members are displaceably disposed on the base member, and the pair of target members are biased by different biasing means. See, for example, JP-A-2013-169262. According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the urging force of the urging unit.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, since each of the target members is urged by a separate urging means, the magnitude of the urging force applied to each of the target members due to the individual difference of the separate urging means. However, there is a problem that variation occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the pair of target members are displaceably disposed on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are attached to one and the other of the pair of target members. Since each is connected, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform. That is, when the two urging means are provided, the urging force applied to the pair of target members varies due to the variation in the characteristics (such as dimensional tolerance) of each urging means. By applying the biasing force to each of the pair of target members, it is possible to suppress the biasing force applied to each of the target members from varying. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the pair of target members from varying.

  In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a pair of target members are respectively disposed on one base member, or the base member is divided and the pair of target members are disposed on different base members. May be used.

  Further, the gaming machine G1 has one side member and another side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and is provided between the one side member and the other side member. It is particularly effective to apply the present invention to a game machine including a displacement member whose other end is guided and displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the gaming machine G1 to a configuration for guiding one end of the displacement member and a configuration for guiding the other end. In such a gaming machine, the gap between the guide at one end of the displacement member and the guide at the other end of the displacement member is likely to occur, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. Is applied, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and the variation in their displacement can be suppressed, so that the guide at one end of the displacement member and the guide at the other end can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement can be suppressed and the displacement member can be displaced stably.

  In the gaming machine G1, a connecting member connected to the base member is provided, and one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the urging means is provided. By being in contact with the connecting member, the urging force of the urging means is applied such that the connecting member is pressed against the base member and the connection between the base member and the connecting member is maintained. Gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine G1, an intermediate portion of the urging means having one end and the other end connected to each of the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as a base. Since the urging force is applied so as to press the member and maintain the connection between the base member and the connecting member, at least the connecting member can be temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, by such temporary fixing, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when attaching the base member and the connecting member to the attachment target. Further, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging of the target member but also as the fixing force of the connecting member to the base member, a member for fixing the connecting member to the base member (for example, , Fastening screws) need not be separately prepared, and it is not necessary to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and the number of assembling steps can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention in which the arm body 7641 and the roller receiving portion 7311e are examples>
One side member and the other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other end side are respectively bridged between the one side member and the other side member and are guided by the one side member and the other side member. A displacement member to be displaced; and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. The displacement member includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the displacement member, and a rotational driving force applied to the rotating member. And a rotation driving means for providing a displacement control means, wherein a displacement regulating means for regulating displacement of the displacement member is provided.

  Here, a game of performing an effect of rotating a rotating body is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231926). Further, one side member and the other side member that are disposed to face each other at a predetermined interval, a long displacement member bridged between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving force is applied to the displacement member. There is known a gaming machine provided with a driving unit that performs the driving (see, for example, JP-A-2014-14602). For example, when the former rotating body is disposed on the latter displacement member, the position where the effect is produced by the rotation of the rotating body can be changed by the displacement of the displacement member.

  However, in this case, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided separately to one side member and the other end side is guided separately to the other side member, the displacement member is likely to rattle or wobble. For this reason, when rotating the rotating body, there is a problem that the rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is easily amplified due to the rotation of the rotating body, resulting in wear and breakage of the movable portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the displacement restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member is provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling or wobbling of the displacement member when rotating the rotating body. . Therefore, even if the rotating body is rotated, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed, and as a result, wear and breakage of the movable portion can be suppressed.

  In addition, even when another member is arranged at a position close to the rotating body at the production position, the rattling or wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed by the displacement restricting means, so that the rotating body collides with the other member. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the rotating body while positioning such another member close to the rotating body.

  In addition, four sets of a set of an arm body and an effect member arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are arranged, and at the effect position, the effect members of each group are brought into contact with each other to form a circle. A form in which an annular shape is formed and the annular shape is arranged so as to surround the rotating body (an annular shape is arranged around the rotating body) may be adopted. According to the gaming machine H1, as described above, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed, and the collision of the rotating body with the rendering member can be suppressed. That is, even in the form in which the toroidal shape (the effect member) surrounds the rotating body, these collisions can be prevented, so that both can be brought close to each other and a gap between the toroidal shape and the rotating body can be reduced. Therefore, an effect of rotating only the rotating body can be performed while allowing the player to recognize the ring shape and the rotating body as a single circle as a whole, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine H1, further comprising a deformable movable mechanism, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end and the other end of the displacement member. H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the movable mechanism is provided so as to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is provided at least at one position between one end and the other end of the displacement member. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be displaced stably.

  On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, the displacement member is likely to rattle or wobble to the extent that the movable mechanism is deformed. For this reason, when the rotating body is rotated, the displacement member is more loose and wobble than when the movable mechanism is not provided, and the movable portion is more likely to be worn or damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, since the displacement of the displacement member can be regulated by the displacement regulating means, even when the movable mechanism is provided, the displacement member may be rattled or wobble. Thus, wear and breakage of the movable portion and collision between the rotating body and the effect member can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is impossible to perform the effect by bringing the effect member close to the rotating rotating body as described above because it is necessary to avoid collision with the rotating body, and in particular, when a movable mechanism is provided, Since the backlash and wobble of the displacement member become excessive, it was impossible to rotate the rotating body itself. On the other hand, by employing a structure in which the displacement of the displacement member is regulated by the displacement regulating means as in the present invention, it becomes possible for the first time to rotate the rotating body even when the movable mechanism is provided. It is a thing.

  In the gaming machine H2, the movable mechanism is formed to include a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the displacement restricting means is configured such that the guided portion of the movable mechanism includes the guide groove. A gaming machine H3 for at least restricting the displacement of the displacement member in a direction guided along.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the displacement restricting means restricts at least the displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the guided portion of the movable mechanism is guided along the guide groove. Factors that cause rattling or wobbling of the member can be efficiently controlled. Therefore, wobbling and wobbling of the displacement member can be reliably suppressed while reducing the force required for the displacement regulating means.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformable members divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and the displacement restricting means is formed so as to be insertable into the gap. And the insertion body is inserted into the gap.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformed members divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and is formed to be insertable into the gap. Since the displacement restricting means is provided with the insertion member and the insert is inserted into the gap, the movable mechanism can be restrained so as not to be deformed (ie, the movable mechanism can be fixed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling or wobbling of the displacement member when the rotating body is rotated, and it is possible to suppress abrasion and breakage of the movable portion and collision between the rotating body and another member.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of the arm body and a rendering member disposed displaceably at the other end of the arm body are provided, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. And a rotation base formed concentrically with the rotating body, and the displacement restricting means is configured such that when the effecting member is arranged at the effecting position, the effecting member or the displacing means of each of the sets is arranged to A gaming machine H5 wherein the displacement of the displacement member is regulated by being brought into contact with the outer periphery of the rotation base.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of an arm body and a rendering member arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided. The displacement restricting means restricts the displacement of the displacement member when the effecting member is disposed at the effecting position and the effecting member or the displacing means of each set abuts on the outer periphery of the rotating base, thereby restricting the displacement of the displacement member. The displacement can be restricted by contacting the outer periphery of the rotating base at a location. That is, since the outer periphery of the rotating base is held at a plurality of locations, displacement of the rotating base (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body, and the plurality of rendering members are provided. Relative position of the rotating body with respect to the predetermined position.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of the arm body and a rendering member disposed displaceably at the other end of the arm body are provided, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. A rotating base that is supported and formed concentrically with the rotating body, and a magnet is disposed on one of the effect member or the displacement means and the rotating base, and on the other, a magnet or iron A member is disposed, and the displacement restricting means is configured such that when the effecting member is disposed at the effecting position, the magnetic force applied between the effecting member or the displacing means of each of the sets and the rotation base causes A gaming machine H6 wherein the displacement of the displacement member is regulated.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of an arm body and a rendering member arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided. The displacement restricting means restricts the displacement of the displacement member by the magnetic force applied between the effect member or the displacement means of each set and the rotating base when the effect member is arranged at the effect position. The displacement of the rotation base can be regulated by applying a magnetic force at the location. That is, since magnetic force is applied to the rotating base from a plurality of directions, displacement of the rotating base (that is, rattling or wobble of the displacement member) can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body. The relative position of the rotating body with respect to the effect member can be positioned at a predetermined position.

  Note that, in the gaming machines H5 and H6, the contacting positions at which the effect members or the displacement means of each set abut on the outer periphery of the rotation base or the positions at which the magnetic force is applied are equally spaced in the circumferential direction (for example, in the case of three sets). Is preferably set to 120 °. In this case, there are four sets of the effect members arranged displaceably on the other end side of the arm body and the other end of the arm body, and the effect members or the displacement means of each set are brought into contact with the outer periphery of the rotary base. It is preferable that the contact position or the position where the magnetic force is applied is set at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (ie, 90 ° intervals). The rotating base can be constrained from all directions by disposing the abutting positions or the positions where the magnetic force acts oppositely (arranging the phases with a difference of 180 °), so that the displacement (chatter or wobble) can be In the case where the relative position of the rotating body with respect to each set of production members is misaligned, the rotation with respect to the production members is caused by the contact when each set of production members is arranged at the production position. This is because the relative position of the body can be corrected (positioned). In the case where the four sets of effect members form an annular shape at the effect position, it is possible to center the rotary body concentrically with respect to the annular shape, which is particularly effective.

  In the case where magnets are arranged on both the directing member or the displacement means and the rotation base, the directions of the magnetic poles of these magnets may be directions in which magnetic force acts in a direction to attract each other, or The directions in which the magnetic force acts in a direction to repel each other may be used.

  In the gaming machine H5 or H6, when the effect members of each set are disposed at the effect position, each effect member causes an adjacent effect member to come into contact with an adjacent effect member, and one of the contact surfaces A magnet is arranged, and on the other contact surface, a magnet is arranged in the direction of the magnetic pole in a direction to be attracted to one magnet by magnetic force, or an iron member is arranged, The gaming machine H7, wherein when the effect member is disposed at the effect position, the contact surfaces of the effect member are magnetically attached.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H5 or H6, when the effect members of each set are arranged at the effect position, each effect member contacts the adjacent effect members with the adjacent effect members. At the same time, the contact surfaces are magnetically attached using the magnetic force of the magnet, so that the effect members can be firmly connected. Accordingly, when the displacement defining means (the effecting member or the displacement means) abuts on the rotating base or exerts a magnetic force to regulate the displacement of the rotating base, the displacement regulating means (the effecting member) itself becomes unstable. The rotation base can be firmly held by suppressing rattling. As a result, the displacement of the rotation base member (ie, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be reliably suppressed, and the relative position of the rotating body with respect to the plurality of effect members can be reliably positioned at a predetermined position.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Gaming machine K1. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine K2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being fused. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, and an urging means having one end connected to the target member and the other end connected to the base member. There is known a gaming machine including an opposing member disposed to oppose a base member with an urging means interposed therebetween (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-28226 (for example, FIG. 20)). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the urging force of the urging unit. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the space in which the urging means can be provided is limited. The present technical concept has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can easily secure a space for disposing an urging unit.
<Means>
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, and one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member, and the other base member connected to the base member. Biasing means having ends connected directly or indirectly, wherein the biasing means is disposed in a bent posture.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 includes, in the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, an opposing member disposed to face the base member with the urging means interposed therebetween, and the opposing member is formed of the urging member. An opening is formed in a region including at least one of the one end and the other end.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the opposing member includes the openings in a region including one end of the urging member and a region including the other end.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, since the urging means is disposed in a bent posture, it is possible to easily secure a space for disposing the urging means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the assembling work can be simplified.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines )
3 31,10331,15331,16331 rear base (base over the scan member)
3 32,10332 intermediate base (base material)
3 64 second rack (rack)
3 65a second pinion (pinion)
366,11366 Urging spring (urging means )

Claims (2)

A base member, a rack disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable , a pinion having a gear meshed with a gear of the rack, and one end of the base member directly or indirectly connected to the rack. A biasing means for directly or indirectly connecting the other end to the rack to apply a biasing force by an elastic recovery force accompanying expansion and contraction,
Equipped with a contact member,
The urging means is configured such that a portion between the one end and the other end is brought into contact with the contact member, so that a linear portion including the one end and a linear portion including the other end are provided. Is provided in a bent posture in which the non-parallel is non-parallel. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images